JP2019187896A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a slot machine capable of preventing a player from being dissatisfied or puzzled following the termination of an advantageous section.SOLUTION: The slot machine includes a main control unit controllable in an advantageous section advantageous to a player. The main control unit can terminate the advantageous section when one of a termination condition 1 or a termination condition 2 is established in the advantageous section, and can execute an advantageous section data initialization process for initialization of information about the advantageous section upon termination of the advantageous section. The slot machine also includes a sub control unit which can perform an advantageous section-related information initialization notification for making a notification that the information about the advantageous section has been initialized. The sub control unit begins the advantageous section-related information initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section has terminated, and continues the advantageous section-related information initialization notification also in a game that follows the game in which the advantageous section has terminated, and that executes a result notification and a normal performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  The slot machine of this type is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches 1,500 games which is a limit value, the advantageous state is terminated and advantageous. There has been proposed a method in which information related to advantageous state control such as the number of remaining games in the state is also initialized (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 6167349

  In the slot machine described in Patent Literature 1, when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is terminated and information related to the control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining games in the advantageous state. Will be initialized, but information related to the control of the advantageous state will be initialized, and there is a risk of dissatisfaction with players who do not know that the information will not be carried over to subsequent games There is a risk of confusion.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that can prevent a player from being dissatisfied or confused at the end of an advantageous section.

In order to solve the above problems, the slot machine of the means 1 of the present invention comprises:
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable,
In the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning can be generated according to the display result.
Advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the advantageous section advantageous to the player;
An advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section when either the first ending condition (ending condition 1) or the second ending condition (ending condition 2) is satisfied in the advantageous section;
Initialization means (advantageous section data initialization process) for initializing information on the advantageous section when either the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous section ends;
Initialization notification means (sub-control unit 91) for performing initialization notification (advantageous section related information initialization notification) for notifying that information relating to the advantageous section is initialized;
Game result notifying means (result notification) for notifying the game result in the advantageous section in the game after the game in which the advantageous section ends,
Normal effect executing means for executing a normal effect after the game result is notified;
With
The initialization notification means starts the initialization notification (advantageous section related information initialization notification) in a game in which the advantageous section ends, and is a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game result is notified. The initialization notification is continued in the game to be executed and the game in which the normal performance is executed.
According to this feature, when one of the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section and the advantageous section ends and the information on the advantageous section is initialized, whether the information on the advantageous section is initial. An initialization notification is made to notify the player that the game will be executed, and even if the advantageous section ends and information about the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused. it can. The initialization notification is started in a game in which the advantageous section ends, a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, and a game in which the game result in the advantageous section is notified, and a normal effect thereafter are executed. Since it is continuously performed in the game, even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it can be surely recognized that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
The first ending condition (ending condition 1) is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a specified number of games (the number of advantageous section games reaches 1500 games),
The second end condition (end condition 2) is characterized in that the gaming value increased during the advantageous section reaches a specified value (a net increase in the number of medals exceeds 2388).
According to this feature, the advantageous section ends when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the specified number of games or the gaming value increased during the advantageous section reaches the specified number, and the advantageous section Since the information is also initialized, it is possible to suppress excessive increase in euphoria from being controlled in the advantageous section.

The slot machine of means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the advantageous state advantageous for the player by consuming the right (navigator stock) in the advantageous section,
The information regarding the advantageous section includes a right to control to the advantageous state (navistock),
The advantageous section ending means has a right to control to the advantageous state when the first ending condition (ending condition 1) or the second ending condition (ending condition 2) is satisfied in the advantageous section (navistock) ), The advantageous section ends.
According to this feature, even when the advantageous section ends with the right to control to the advantageous state, and the right to control to the advantageous state as information on the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, it is indicated to the player. Since it can be recognized, it can prevent a player from being dissatisfied or confused.

The slot machine of means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 3,
In the advantageous section, there is provided a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (AT effect, navigation stock suggestion effect) suggesting that the right to control to the advantageous state (navigator stock) remains.
According to this feature, when it is suggested that the right to control to the advantageous state remains, the advantageous section ends, and the right to control to the advantageous state as information on the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over However, since the player can recognize it, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

The slot machine of means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The first ending condition (ending condition 1) is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a specified number of games (the number of advantageous section games reaches 1500 games),
The second end condition (end condition 2) is that the gaming value increased during the advantageous section reaches a specified value (the net number of medals exceeds 2388),
When the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous section ends, the slot machine controls the advantageous section when the game that ends the advantageous section is started (when the start switch 7 is operated). It is characterized by comprising first end condition establishment notifying means (end condition establishment notification 1) for notifying that the number of played games has reached the specified number of games.
According to this feature, it can be recognized that the advantageous section ends in the game when the first end condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The first ending condition (ending condition 1) is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a specified number of games (the number of advantageous section games reaches 1500 games),
The second end condition (end condition 2) is that the gaming value increased during the advantageous section reaches a specified value (the net number of medals exceeds 2388),
In the slot machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous section ends, when the game in which the advantageous section ends is completed (all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and the third stop is performed). Second stop condition establishment notifying means (end condition establishment notification 2) for notifying that the gaming value increased during the advantageous section has reached a specified value when the stop switch operation is completed). It is a feature.
According to this feature, it can be recognized that the advantageous section ends in the game when the second end condition is satisfied.

  Note that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in the means 2, 5 and 6 reaching the prescribed number of games may be that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the prescribed number of games. It may be established when the number of games controlled in the section exceeds the number of games immediately before reaching the specified number of games. Similarly, when the gaming value increased during the advantageous section reaches the specified value, the gaming value increased during the advantageous section may be equal to or greater than the specified value, or the gaming value increased during the advantageous section may be increased. It may be established when the value just before reaching the specified value is exceeded.

The slot machine of means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A game state transition in which a specific display result (promotional replay symbol combination) is derived in the first gaming state (CZRT) to shift to a second gaming state (advantageous RT) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Means,
A first gaming state transition means capable of transitioning to the first gaming state (CZRT) after the end of the second gaming state (advantageous RT);
When the right to move to the second gaming state (advantageous RT) (navigation stock) remains in the advantageous section, the specific display result (design combination of promotion replay) is derived in the first gaming state (CZRT) Operation mode notification means (specific navigation notification, specific navigation effect) capable of reporting the operation mode (push order) to be performed;
With
The information related to the advantageous section includes a right (navigator stock) to shift to the second gaming state (advantageous RT).
According to this feature, the advantageous section ends while leaving the right to shift to the second gaming state, and the right to shift to the second gaming state as information on the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, and in the subsequent first gaming state Even when the operation mode for deriving the specific display result is not notified, it is possible to make the player recognize that, so that the player can be prevented from being dissatisfied or confused.

The slot machine of means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
A game value storage means (RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
When the settlement operation is performed (when the settlement switch 10 is operated in a state where the game is not being performed), the settlement control is performed to settle the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means and return it to the player. A settlement control means to perform (main control unit 41);
With
The initialization notification means terminates the initialization notification (advantageous section related information initialization notification) when the settlement control is performed.
According to this feature, when the player finishes the game, the initialization notification is terminated in response to the settlement control being performed, so the initialization notification continues even though the player has changed. Can be prevented.

The slot machine of means 9 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The game can be started by setting the number of bets required to start the game,
The initialization notification means is configured to notify the initialization notification (advantageous section related information initialization notification) when a predetermined period (3 minutes) elapses without setting the number of bets for starting the next game after the game ends. It is characterized by being terminated.
According to this feature, after the game is over, the number of bets for starting the next game is not set, and the initialization notification is terminated when a predetermined period has elapsed, so that the initial change is made even though the player has changed. It is possible to prevent the chemical notification from continuing.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a game auxiliary | assistant display. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution aspect of a navigation alerting | reporting and a navigation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a game area. It is a figure for demonstrating advantageous area alerting | reporting and internal suggestion. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display in an error state and a setting confirmation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the order of restart of advantageous area alerting | reporting and navigation alerting | reporting when electric power supply is restarted after the electric power supply to a slot machine was stopped during execution of advantageous area alerting | reporting and navigation alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game start waiting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the ball control process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the AT state management process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a change of a pure increase number counter value. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal payout process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the re-game action which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of display modes, such as a game auxiliary | assistant display, at the time of the start of advantageous area alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of display modes, such as a game auxiliary indicator, at the time of completion | finish of advantageous area alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of display modes, such as a game auxiliary indicator, at the time of completion | finish of advantageous area alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the control state regarding AT. It is a figure for demonstrating AT production (normal) which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating AT production (ending) and prior alerting | reporting which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending suggestion effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the result alerting | reporting and subsequent alerting which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing which a sub-control part complete | finishes an after report. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a game and production. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of prior notification and subsequent notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of prior notification and subsequent notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the internal lottery object combination in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game and effect in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of prior alerting | reporting and subsequent alerting in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of prior alerting | reporting and subsequent alerting in Example 2. FIG.

  A mode for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1a. Yes. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are arranged in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in a see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each is displayed in three stages, upper, middle and lower, so that it can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of kinds of symbols (“red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a” ”,“ Cherry b ”,“ Bell ”,“ Replay ”,“ Plum ”) are arranged in a predetermined order.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may be used. . In the present embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R constitute a variable display unit that variably displays a symbol. However, the variable display unit may be other than the reel, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. The structure which can carry out the variable display of the symbol by moving the belt arrange | positioned may be sufficient. In this embodiment, the variable display unit is configured by a physical reel. However, the variable display unit may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) ), The MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum number of bets out of the prescribed number (3 in this embodiment) determined according to the gaming state within the range, as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when the medal used for setting the medal and the bet number stored (returning the medal used for setting the credit and the bet number) is operated when starting the game Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when stopping the rotation of the start switch 7 and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively, can be operated by the player. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning and the contents when an error occurs are shown. Game auxiliary display 12 for displaying error code, operation information (navigation information) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, advantageous section display indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous section, and the number of bets 1 BETLED 14 that informs that 1 is set by lighting, 2 BETLED 15 that informs that 2 bets are set, 2 BETLED 16 that notifies that 3 bets are set, 3 There is a game start operation by operating the throw-in request LED 17 and the start switch 7 to notify the possible state by lighting. A start valid LED 18 for informing that it is lit, and a waiting LED 19 for informing that it is in a wait state (a state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). A game display unit 13 provided with a replaying LED 20 for notifying that a replay game is in progress by lighting is provided. In addition, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image or the like is provided on the front surface of the slot machine 1.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R are left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) that notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. Is provided.

  Inside the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, while changing the set value or checking the set value, A set value display 24 for displaying a set value, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, either a hopper tank side or a medal payout exit 9 side described later provided inside the slot machine 1. There are provided a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching and a medal selector (not shown) having an insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, the reel unit 34 for driving the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above according to the control signal from the main control unit 41, and the medal according to the control signal from the main control unit 41. Is provided from the medal payout opening 9.

  The slot machine 1 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state. The setting change state will be described later. There is provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game state. Production control is performed.

  The game control board 40 includes the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, reel unit 34 reel sensor (not shown), and hopper. A payout sensor and a full sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches and the like are input.

  The game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle, right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel unit 34, and the hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electric components are mounted on the game control board 40. It is driven based on the control of the main control unit 41.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, and is mounted with a main control unit 41 for controlling the game.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to an effect device such as the above-described liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting sound, and a reel LED (not shown) capable of irradiating a predetermined position of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back side. The output state of these effect devices can be controlled by the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. In response to the command transmitted from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 performs various controls for producing effects.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage such as an internal lottery. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the store clerk possessing a predetermined key among the store clerk of the installed amusement store can operate. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires a further key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the setting key switch 37 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a store clerk who has the predetermined key can operate. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state in the normal state.

  In the case of playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets using credits. When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, a predetermined pay line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged in the middle in the horizontal direction. Is set across the symbols), and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit. In this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

  When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, stop control is performed on the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the reels is performed. The reel is stopped and the symbol of the reel is derived and displayed as a display result on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  In the stop control, the control for stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation within the maximum stop delay time (in this embodiment, 190 ms (milliseconds)) from when each stop switch is operated is performed. Is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotations) x 21 (the number of symbols per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 frames is changed, so a predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, a maximum of four symbols can be drawn. In other words, in the stop control, the symbol displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbol that is four frames ahead from that symbol, a total of five symbols (retraction range), one symbol. Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2R, 2R.

  Thereby, in the stop control, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is operated to stop the rotation, the winning combination won by the internal lottery described later is selected. If the symbol to be configured is within the drawing range from the symbol when the stop switch is operated to 4 frames ahead, the symbol is drawn onto the winning line LN and the reel for which the stop switch is operated is rotated. On the other hand, if the symbol constituting the winning combination won in the internal lottery is not within the drawing range, the symbol constituting the winning combination not won in the internal lottery is the winning line LN. In order not to stop upward, a symbol that does not constitute any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and control is performed to stop the rotation of the reel on which the stop switch is operated. It is possible.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and the combination of symbols of the winning combination predetermined on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In some cases, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. .

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of winning combinations (hereinafter referred to as winning combinations) are determined according to the gaming state, and it is not necessary to set a small combination with payout of medals and the number of bets. In addition, there are a re-playing role that enables the next game to be started and a special role that involves a transition to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow winnings in each of the above-mentioned combinations before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, a predetermined number When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the bet number set, the random number is used for determination.

  Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and it is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It has become.

  Further, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order, operation timing) determined in advance, it is a small advantage that is advantageous over the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A combination and a re-playing combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target combination) can be won. For example, the role subject to navigation may be a role that is more advantageous than a stop mode that stops when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode. In addition, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode that is determined in advance, a role that has a higher rate of stoppage that is more advantageous than when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode is included. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode with medal grant, but also a stop mode with a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stop mode with which a transition to an unfavorable gaming state is avoided, and the like.

  The main control unit 41 executes navigation notification that notifies the navigation information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT) that is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 starts the AT control and controls the AT by giving the player the right to be controlled by the AT. When the control is performed by the AT, the navigation target is won by winning the navigation target role, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player (for example, pressing order, Operation timing etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command capable of specifying an operation mode advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whereby the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to notify using 51 etc. is performed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary indicator 12 capable of displaying the number of medals paid out, an error code, and navigation information, and uses the game auxiliary indicator 12 in the control of navigation notification. The navigation information is notified, but a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation information may be provided, and the navigation information may be notified using the dedicated display in the navigation notification control.

[About gaming state]
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state as non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB). The gaming state is a state in which the type of re-game player to be a lottery subject to internal lottery and the probability that the re-game player will be won by internal lottery are common. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a re-gamer is different for each game state in non-internal, internal, BB general in special state, and RB in special state, but in the same game state, The probability of winning is uniform. In addition, the types of re-game players who are subject to lottery by internal lottery in the inside are the same as those in non-inside, but the types of re-game players who are subject to lottery by internal lottery in BB in general and RB are as follows: Unlike the non-inside, the type of re-gamer to be a lottery subject to the internal lottery in the BB in general is different from the RB.

  In the non-internal state, the winning of the special role (BB) is not carried over. When the slot machine 1 is activated in a state where the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to the gaming state is stored is first controlled to be non-internal. . Moreover, it is controlled in the non-internal state when the special state is terminated. Then, during the non-internal state, the special combination (BB) is won by the internal lottery in the non-internal internal game, and the special combination is lost and transferred to the inside. In addition, in the game in which the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery, the special combination (BB) wins and the game is ended by shifting to the special state.

  It should be noted that the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to the gaming state is stored is not initialized when the setting changing state is transferred to, and after the setting changing state is finished, The game state before the start is taken over. In other words, if it was controlled in the non-internal state before the start of the setting change state, it was controlled in the non-internal state after the end of the setting change state, and controlled in the internal state before the start of the setting change state. In addition, even after the end of the setting change state, the internal control is continued.

  During non-inside, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in a game within a predetermined period, the payout rate of medals per game during the period can be increased. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous for the player, the medal payout rate per game during the period does not exceed 100%. Yes. As will be described later, in the non-inside, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, so that the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%.

  Inside, the special role (BB) is being carried over. It starts when a special combination (BB) wins in the internal lottery in the non-inside.

  Inside the game within a predetermined period, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the medal payout rate per game during the period is 100%. On the other hand, since the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. In the period in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, while in the period in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, the medal per game is The payout rate does not exceed 100%. In the inside, the probability that the small role is won by the internal lottery is the same as the probability of the non-inside, while the predetermined replaying role (in this embodiment, the replaying role 1) is won by the internal lottery. The probability of performing is set higher than that in the non-inside, and the inside is in an advantageous state as compared to that in the non-inside.

  The special state is a gaming state controlled in accordance with the winning of the special role (BB), and is started when the special role (BB) wins in a non-inside state, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, in the special state) The total payout number of medals exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 50)). After the end of the special state, it is transferred to non-internal.

  The special state includes BB general and RB as the gaming state, and in the special state, the game state is controlled to one of the gaming states until the above-described predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

  In general, the probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery is the same as that in the non-inside and in the inside, but the probability of winning the special role (RB) is high. It starts when the special combination (BB) wins in the inside and shifts to the special state, or when the RB is terminated in a state where the special condition termination condition is not satisfied. The BB general is terminated when the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the process proceeds to RB.

  RB is a state in which the probability that a small role is won in the internal lottery is higher than that in the inside, inside, and BB in general. The special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery in the general BB, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The RB is at least one of winning a predetermined number of times (8 times in the present embodiment) during the RB and playing a predetermined number of games (12 games in the present embodiment) during the RB. Is established, and the process proceeds to BB general.

  In BB in general, the probability that a special combination (RB) wins in the internal lottery is set higher than the probability of winning in a non-inside and inside. In addition, the probability that the re-gamer will win in the internal lottery is set to 0, and the probability that the re-gamer will win in the non-inside will be assigned to the probability that the special role (RB) will win in the general BB. ing. On the other hand, the probability that the small role is won in the internal lottery in the general BB is set to the same probability as that in the non-inside and inside.

  In addition, in the BB in general, a small role is won in the internal lottery with the same probability as in the non-inside and inside, but as will be described later, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified without being controlled to the advantageous section. Not to be. A special combination (RB) that can be won in BB in general is a combination in which medals are not paid out in accordance with winning. Accordingly, the payout rate of medals in general BB does not exceed 100%.

  RB is a state in which the probability that a small role is won in the internal lottery is higher than the probability of winning in a non-inside and inside. In the RB, in the internal lottery, the first small role (book) in which a smaller number (for example, one) of medals than the number of medals (for example, three) used for setting the number of bets for one game is paid out in accordance with the winning. In the embodiment, the RB medium / small combination 2) is a second small combination (in this embodiment) in which more medals (for example, 8) than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets for one game are paid out upon winning. In this case, the RB medium / small role 1) is won with a higher probability (for example, about 3/4) than the probability of winning (for example, about 1/4), and the number of medals paid out per game in the RB The expected value (for example, 2.75) is smaller than the number of medals (for example, 3) used for setting the number of bets for one game. Further, as will be described later, it is not controlled in the advantageous section, and the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified. As a result, during RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%. That is, in BB general and RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%, and the medal payout rate in the special state does not exceed 100%. Moreover, in BB general and RB, it is not controlled to an advantageous area.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special role (BB) is elected with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1 / 3.4) determined in advance in the non-inside, and moves into the inside. If the special flag (BB) winning flag is carried over inside, if the AT is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, the medal payout rate per game does not exceed 100%. When controlled, the medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%.

  In addition, in the reel stop control, when a special combination and a small combination are won at the same time, the control is performed so that the small combination is given priority, and all of the internal lottery targets are selected. The drawing range for the special role (BB) is overlapped with the drawing size range for the small role in any of the small roles, and the winning symbol's winning symbol is the winning line regardless of which of the small roles is won. It will stop at LN. In addition, when the special combination and the re-playing combination are won at the same time, the control is performed so that the re-playing combination is always made. That is, the special combination (BB) is not won when a small combination or replay combination is elected inside.

  In addition, since one of the small roles or one of the re-playing roles is always won in the inside, the special role (BB) will not win a prize once transferred to the inside. After the transition, the inside is maintained.

  In the slot machine 1, since most of the games are controlled inside, it is assumed that the inside is controlled, and medals are paid out according to the set value (1 to 6 in this embodiment). Whether or not to control the AT in the inside so that the rate becomes a value determined according to each set value, specifically, winning probability of AT lottery described later, winning probability of navigation lottery, etc. are set Thus, a medal payout rate corresponding to the set value is set.

  Also, since the medal payout rate is set according to the set value on the assumption that the inside is controlled, the medal payout rate is as designed when it is controlled in a gaming state other than the inside. It is preferable that the inside is controlled as much as possible. For this reason, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode recommended for the player and the operation mode for winning the special combination (BB) are different so that the player can easily move into the inside. That is, as long as the player performs a stop operation in the recommended operation mode in the non-inside, the special combination (BB) is not won.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 wins the special combination (BB) when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived. It can be carried over after the game.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the AT to notify the operation mode (the correct pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R which are advantageous by the navigation notification in the inside where the winning of the special role (BB) is carried over. The medal payout rate is designed to be appropriate in the interior.

  In addition, as will be described later, in non-inside and inside of the gaming state, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed by winning an advantageous section transition lottery subject described later in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. The winning game section may be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. On the other hand, in the special state in the gaming state, as will be described later, the winning section is not won in the advantageous section shift lottery, and the gaming section is not shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section.

  In addition, the special state is a state in which the winning probability of a small role is increased by an internal lottery for each prescribed number of games, for example, and is shifted to a predetermined case and continued until a predetermined number of games is performed. It may be in a state where the winning probability of the small role is increased in the internal lottery for each specified number of games, or it may be in a state where the random number value acquired in the internal lottery is not changed. This is a state in which a small role is won, and it may be shifted to a predetermined game and ended when one game is played, or the winning probability of a small role is increased by internal lottery for each specified number of games. In other words, it may be a state in which a transition is made on the condition that a predetermined symbol combination is derived to the reel, and the game is terminated by playing one game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the special state (BB) in the non-internal state by winning a special state, and in the BB general included in the special state, the special part (in the internal lottery ( RB) is elected and the special role (RB) wins, and the RB is controlled. However, the special role (RB) can be elected even in the internal lottery. It may be configured that the special role (RB) that is won in the game wins or is controlled by the RB.

[About lottery eligible for internal lottery]
An internal lottery object combination that is a lottery object in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target roles. Each internal lottery target includes one or a plurality of winning combinations. When one internal lottery target is won in the internal lottery, the winning combination included in the internal lottery target is elected at the same time. .

  As shown in FIG. 5, the internal lottery target roles include special role (BB), special role (RB), push order small role 1, push order small role 2, push order small role 3, push order small role 4, Push order small combination 5, Push order small combination 6 (hereinafter, push order small combinations 1 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push order small combinations), specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2, RB medium small combination 1, RB medium / small combination 2 and replay combination 1 are included.

  The special combination (BB) is a combination that involves the transition to the special state described above by winning. The special role (BB) is subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to be non-inside, while the gaming state is controlled to be inside and special (BB general, RB) Not eligible for internal lottery.

  The special combination (RB) is a combination accompanied by a shift to the above-mentioned RB by winning a prize. Special roles (RB) are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to BB in general, while internal lottery is performed when the gaming state is controlled to non-internal and internal, BB general, and RB. The probability that a special role (RB) will win in the internal lottery is in a state other than the general BB (non-inside, inside, RB) It has become a higher probability than.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the non-inside and inside, the special role (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery, and the gaming state shifts from the non-inside or inside to the RB. However, the special role (RB) is subject to lottery of the internal lottery even when the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal or internal state, (RB) may be elected and the symbol combination of the special role (RB) may be stopped by the reel, so that the gaming state can be shifted from non-internal or internal to RB.

  The push order small combinations 1 to 6 are operated by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in this embodiment, operation order) assigned to each push order small combination. Among the winning combinations included in the above, an increasing combination in which more medals than the bet amount are paid out wins, while the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, Of the winning combinations included in the push order small combinations, a decreasing combination in which the number of medals equal to or less than the number of bets is paid out may win, but none of the winning combinations may win. For this reason, when winning the push order small combinations 1 to 6, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out may be changed depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode corresponding to the type of the winning combination. it can.

  An operation mode in which the winning combination included in the push order small combination when winning the push order small combination 1 to 6 can be won, that is, an operation mode advantageous to the player is a small push order. In the combination 1, an operation in an operation order in which the left reel 2 </ b> L is stopped first, the middle reel 2 </ b> C is stopped second, and the right reel 2 </ b> R is stopped third (hereinafter referred to as a left middle right stop operation). In the push order small combination 2, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter, left and right) In the push order small combination 3, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. Operation (hereinafter referred to as middle / left / right stop operation) In the push order small combination 4, the operation in the operation order in which the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped third (hereinafter, middle right and left) In the push order small combination 5, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third. In the push order small combination 6, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is 3 The operation in the order of operations to be stopped second (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as right middle left stop operation).

  Push order smalls 1 to 6 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is not controlled inside or inside, and generally controlled by the BB, and are also selected for internal lottery when controlled in any of these gaming states. And win with the same probability. On the other hand, push order small combinations 1 to 6 are not targeted for internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to RB.

  The specific small role 1 and the specific small role 2 are roles having a low probability of winning in the internal lottery as compared to other internal lottery target roles. In addition, the specified small combination 1 is a combination having a higher probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specific small combination 2. Specified small role 1 and Specified small role 2 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is not inside and inside, and is generally controlled by the BB, and when the gaming state is controlled to any of these gaming states, The lottery will be won with the same probability. Further, the specific small combination 1 and the specific small combination 2 are not subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to RB.

  RB Medium / Minimum 1 and RB Medium / Minimum 2 are not subject to internal lottery when the game state is non-internal and internal, and when BB is generally controlled, and only when the game state is controlled by RB Eligible for lottery.

  The RB medium / small combination 1 is a small combination that is paid out in accordance with winning a prize, in which a larger number of medals than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets for one game (in this embodiment), The lottery will be won with a probability of about 1/4. On the other hand, the RB medium / small combination 2 is a small combination that is paid out in accordance with winning a prize, which is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number of one game (in this embodiment, one). The internal lottery is won with a probability of about 3/4. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game during RB is 2.75, which is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number of one game (three in this embodiment). The payout rate of the medal is not to exceed 100%.

  Re-Gamer 1 is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether the game state is controlled inside or inside, and is in any non-inside or inside game state. Even when it is controlled, an internal lottery is won with the same probability. Further, when the gaming state is BB general or RB, it is not subject to internal lottery.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled inside, the above-mentioned small combinations (push order small combinations 1-6, specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2) and internal lottery and The probability that the re-playing role (re-playing role 1) will be won is won when all the push order small roles 1 to 6 are won, and when all the specified small roles 1 and 2 are selected When a small role is won without being missed, the net increase in medals (obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets during the predetermined period from the total number of medals paid out during the predetermined period. (The total number of medals) is designed so that an average value per game is a predetermined value (three in this embodiment).

  In the internal lottery, the special combination (BB), special combination (RB), push order small combination 1-6, RB medium / small combination 1, RB medium / small combination 2, replay combination 1 among the internal lottery eligible combinations are slot machines 1 While winning with a uniform probability regardless of the set value, there is no difference according to the set value set in, while the specified small role 1 of the internal lottery target And the specific small role 2 is won with a probability having a difference according to the set value.

  The main control unit 41 can perform an advantageous section lottery that determines whether or not to shift a gaming section, which will be described later, to an advantageous section, when a predetermined internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery. . Hereinafter, an internal lottery target combination that triggers an advantageous section lottery may be referred to as an advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery, even if any set value is set, if the advantageous section transition lottery target winning in the internal lottery is the same combination, there is a uniform probability that it will be transferred to the advantageous section. An advantageous section shift lottery is performed as determined.

  Among the internal lottery target combinations, the push order small combinations 1 to 6, the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, and the re-playing combination 1 are advantageous section transition lottery target combinations. These advantageous section transition lottery targets are selected with the same probability in the internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to any of the non-internal and internal gaming states, and the gaming state is An advantageous section transition lottery is performed in response to a combination in which the winning probability of the internal lottery does not change regardless of whether it is controlled inside or not inside.

  In addition, in the inside, a role that is not subject to internal lottery (in the embodiment, special role (BB), special role (RB), RB medium and small role 1, RB medium and small role 2), and the game state is not inside, inside The advantage section shift lottery is not performed in response to the role that the probability of winning in the internal lottery varies depending on which one is controlled.

  The main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control to the above-described AT, when a predetermined internal lottery object combination is won in the internal lottery. Hereinafter, an internal lottery target role that triggers an AT lottery may be referred to as an AT lottery target role.

  Among the internal lottery target combinations, the push order small combinations 1 to 6, the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, and the replaying combination 1 are AT lottery target combinations. When the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, an AT lottery is performed by winning one of these AT lottery targets in the internal lottery. In the AT lottery, even if any setting value is set in the slot machine 1, when the AT lottery target winning in the internal lottery is the same combination, it is determined that the AT is controlled with a uniform probability. A lottery will be held so that

  Also, in the AT lottery that is triggered by the fact that the specific small role 1 or the specific small role 2 is won in the internal lottery, it is triggered by any one of the push order small roles 1 to 6 or the re-playing role 1 The decision to control to the AT is made with a higher probability than when the control is performed. In addition, in the AT lottery performed when the specified small role 1 is won, it is determined that the AT is controlled with a higher probability than when the specified small role 2 is won. It is like that.

  In addition, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target wins in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target In the advantageous section transition lottery to be performed, a lottery may be performed with a probability having a difference according to a set value, so that a transition to the advantageous section is determined with a probability having a difference according to the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the AT lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery performed when the AT lottery target role is won Then, a configuration may be used in which the fact that the AT is controlled is determined with a probability having a difference according to the set value by performing a lottery with a probability having a difference according to the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the AT lottery target role in the internal lottery is a probability that differs depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery performed when the AT lottery target role is won Then, a configuration may be used in which the fact that the AT is controlled is determined with a probability having a difference according to the set value by performing a lottery with a probability having a difference according to the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning combination in the internal lottery has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value set in the slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as a setting difference winning combination). Regardless of whether it is a role with no difference (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a role with no set difference), and a winning lottery lottery or AT lottery will be triggered by the winning of that role. However, on the occasion that the winning combination in the internal lottery is a role with a setting difference, an advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed, while on the other hand, an advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is triggered It may be configured so that one of the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery is triggered by the winning of the role with the setting difference in the internal lottery, and the other of the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery is set by the internal lottery Triggered by winning the role with no difference It may be in the configuration.

[About configuration of game auxiliary display]
The structure of the game auxiliary | assistant indicator 12 with which the main control part 41 is provided is demonstrated based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game auxiliary indicator 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off each of the first to eighth segments, and can light each segment. It is a display. By controlling the predetermined segment of each indicator 12L, 12R to the lighting mode, predetermined numbers (“0” to “9”), symbols (for example, “-”, “.”, Etc.), alphabetic characters (for example, “E ”Etc.) is displayed in one or two digits, so that the number of medals paid out (not shown), the fact that it is controlled to an advantageous section (see FIG. 6B), and the type of error that has occurred It is possible to display an identifiable error code (for example, refer to FIG. 10A), a navigation number (refer to FIG. 7), etc. as navigation information notified by navigation notification.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 41 controls the game section as an advantageous section, and when a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied (for example, after the start of the advantageous section, the navigation notification is first issued). Over the notification period from when the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) is started to the time when the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section is ended). Informing that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the auxiliary game display 12R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advantageous section notification LED 12a) to be lit. It is possible to perform advantageous section notification.

[About navigation and navigation effects]
A navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the game auxiliary display 12 and a navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 performs AT control, and when a navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, a navigation notification is executed and the player is notified. By displaying the navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are advantageous (in this embodiment, the order of operation, hereinafter referred to as the correct answer pressing order) on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to notify an operation mode that is advantageous for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the navigation notification includes left middle right navigation, left and right middle navigation, middle left and right navigation, middle right left navigation, right left middle navigation, right middle left navigation. In the middle left / right navigation, the navigation number “1-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left middle right stop operation. In the left / right middle navigation, a navigation number “2-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left / right middle stop operation. In the middle / left / right navigation, a navigation number “3-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the middle / left / right stop operation. In the middle right / left navigation, the navigation number “4-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the middle right / left stop operation. In the middle left / right navigation, the navigation number “5-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the middle right stop operation. In the middle right / left navigation, the navigation number “6-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the middle right / left stop operation.

  Moreover, after starting the advantageous area notification which alert | reports that the main control part 41 is controlling to the advantageous area by the advantageous area notification LED12a as mentioned above, the said advantageous area notification LED12a is continued to be in a lighting state. In the case where navigation notification is performed during execution of the advantageous section notification, the navigation number to be notified by the navigation notification is displayed while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be lit. The display 12 is controlled to be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the navigation notification, the operation order (correct answer pressing order) is reported as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player. The configuration suggesting the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R advantageous to the player may be used, or the configuration suggesting the combination of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R advantageous to the player may be used. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is a predetermined operation timing for a predetermined reel, the liquid crystal display 51 corresponds to an image of a symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing to the predetermined reel. It is possible to suggest the said operation mode by displaying on the position to perform.

  When performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 transmits, to the sub-control unit 91, a command that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is notified by the navigation notification. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a navigation effect that causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a navigation image suggesting an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R specified based on the command. . In the navigation image, a numerical image “1” to “3” that suggests the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a symbol image that suggests that the stop operation is performed at a timing when a predetermined symbol is displayed on the reel. , Display corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the navigation effect, for example, when a left middle right stop operation is notified by navigation notification, a navigation image suggesting the left middle right stop operation (in this embodiment, corresponding to the left reel 2L). The liquid crystal display 51 displays a numerical image of “1” at a position to be displayed, “2” at a position corresponding to the middle reel 2C, and a “123” numerical image to display “3” at a position corresponding to the right reel 2R. Display. In addition, when the left / right / middle stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, the middle / left / right stop operation is notified, the middle / left / left stop operation is notified, the right / left / middle stop operation is notified, the right / left / left stop operation is notified. Is notified, the navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and control is performed to suggest the corresponding operation mode.

[About the game section]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can control the game section as a normal section or an advantageous section.

  The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification is not performed. After the advantageous section is ended, the next game is started, and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery. Is finished. In the normal section, the advantageous section notification described above is not performed, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off.

  Further, in the normal section, when the above-described gaming state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target (push order small combination 1-6, When the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, and the re-playing combination 1) are elected, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by performing the advantageous section transition lottery.

  The probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and is based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target. In the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery for determining whether or not to move to the advantageous section with a difference in accordance with a set value set in the slot machine 1 based on a predetermined advantageous section transition lottery table is performed. Is possible. Moreover, in the advantageous section transition lottery, it can be determined that the transition to the advantageous section is made with a uniform probability based on the lottery result of the internal lottery regardless of the controlled gaming state (non-inside, inside). It has become.

  Also, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the probability that it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the game state is BB in a special state, that is, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 0. In general, even if the winning section transition lottery target is won, it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery, and it is not shifted to the advantageous section. In addition, when the gaming state is a special state, even if the winning section transition lottery target is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, so that it is not possible to shift to the advantageous section.

  In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the RB in the special state, as described above, the advantageous section transition lottery target is not a lottery object and is not won in the internal lottery, so an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. And there is no transition to the advantageous section. That is, when it is controlled to a special state (BB general and RB), it is prevented from shifting to an advantageous section.

  Also, in the normal section, regardless of whether the above-mentioned gaming state is controlled to non-internal or internal, the AT lottery is not performed even if the above-mentioned AT lottery target is won in the internal lottery. The AT is not determined to control, and the AT is not controlled. The AT lottery during the normal section may be configured such that the AT control is not determined by setting the probability of winning the AT control to 0.

  In addition, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target wins in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target Even in the advantageous section transition lottery performed, the lottery may be determined so as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. Further, there is a difference in the probability that an advantageous section transition lottery target winning team will win in the internal lottery according to a set value set in the slot machine 1, and an advantage performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination. The section shift lottery may be configured to perform a lottery to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. Further, there is a difference in the probability that an advantageous section transition lottery target winning team will win in the internal lottery according to a set value set in the slot machine 1, and an advantage performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination. The section shift lottery may also be configured to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value set in the slot machine 1.

  The advantageous section is a gaming section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is a gaming section that is advantageous in comparison with the normal section because the navigation notification can be executed. The advantageous section is started when the next game is started after it is determined in the normal section that the advantageous section transition lottery is performed in the advantageous section transition lottery, and is terminated when a predetermined advantageous section ending condition is satisfied. . In the advantageous section, after the start of the advantageous section, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game in which the navigation notification is first performed and the medal payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) can exceed 100%. The advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit to notify that the advantageous section is controlled. Further, in the advantageous section, navigation notification is performed when a predetermined navigation condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, it is controlled to the AT state described later and the navigation target combination is elected in the internal lottery). The operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R advantageous to the player is notified.

  Further, in the advantageous section, when the aforementioned gaming state is controlled inside, the AT lottery is performed by winning the AT lottery target role in the internal lottery. By winning the AT lottery, the system shifts to an AT state where the AT is controlled thereafter. When the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, navigation notification is performed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player is notified, The game section is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal section.

  In the advantageous section, when the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal, the AT lottery is not performed and the AT is not controlled even if the AT lottery target role is won in the internal lottery. It is like that. Moreover, in the advantageous section, even if the above-mentioned advantageous section shift lottery target is won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed.

  The end condition of the advantageous section is the end condition 1 established when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section Is the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum number (15) of the payout number in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number 2400) and the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number is added. Is an end condition that can be satisfied without being based on the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in the number of medals. In the present embodiment, (The controlled gaming state is not inside) is included, and the end condition 3 is satisfied, and at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied. It is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery is won by the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. However, when the gaming section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition role is elected in advance, so that the gaming section is moved to the advantageous section. It may be configured to shift to

  In this way, the main control unit 41 can control to an advantageous section both in the non-inside where the winning of the special role (BB) is not carried over and in the inside where the winning of the special role (BB) is carried over. It is. The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside is that at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 is satisfied, while the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside is that the end condition 3 is satisfied, The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside is different from the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside. As a result, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, the end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the advantageous section in the non-inside inside Since the end condition is different, suitable control can be performed depending on whether the inside is inside or not inside.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 is a structure which is not controlled to an advantageous area in BB generally. Thereby, in the BB general in which the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, it is not controlled to the advantageous section, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the BB general can be omitted.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 is the structure which does not control to an advantageous area in RB. As a result, in the RB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, it is not controlled to the advantageous section, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB can be omitted.

[Advantageous section notifications and internal suggestions]
The preparation effect that the sub-control unit 91 performs using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 has won the special combination (BB) in the internal lottery, but the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished in the game (the stop switch is released). When all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, the special combination (BB) symbol combination is not stopped on the reels, and the selected special combination (BB) is carried over without winning a prize. If it becomes, the game state is shifted from the non-internal state to the internal state at the end of the game, and is controlled from the start of the next game to the internal state.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 can transmit a command capable of specifying the gaming state controlled in accordance with the progress of the game to the sub-control unit 91, and controls at the start of each game. A command capable of specifying a game state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, a command that can specify the currently controlled gaming state, gaming section, and AT-related control state at a predetermined timing in each game (when the game is started by operating the start switch 7 in this embodiment). Transmit to the sub-control unit 91. In the next game at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended and the game is ended by stopping all reels) A command that can specify the game state to be controlled, the game section, and the control state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, when the RAM clear that initializes the storage area including the predetermined area in which the data relating to the gaming state is stored in the RAM 41c is performed, a command that can specify that the RAM clear is performed is sent to the sub-control unit 91. To send.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a preparation effect that suggests that the gaming state controlled on the main control unit 41 side is not inside. It is.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9A, the sub control unit 91 determines that the RAM clear is performed on the main control unit 41 side based on a command received from the main control unit 41, and then the gaming state is changed. The storage means (for example, RAM, etc.) of the sub-control unit 91 is not yet transferred to the inside but is specified to be controlled to the inside, or when the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory. After starting in the initialized state, when the game state is not yet controlled to the inside on the main control unit 41 side, and it is specified that the game state is controlled to the inside, it is a preparation effect Control to do.

  In preparation for preparation, a preparation screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a “preparation” character image) and a non-inside medium suggestion image (in this embodiment, a star image) are displayed on a liquid crystal display. 51. When it is specified that the gaming state is non-internal, the in-preparation screen and the non-internal internal suggestion image are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the game is being prepared. If the game state is in the non-internal state and the game state is not in the non-internal state and is specified as a special state, the non-internal internal suggestion image is not displayed. By displaying only the image being prepared, it is suggested that the game is being prepared and that the game state is controlled to a special state.

  When it is specified that the gaming state has been shifted to the inside based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the preparation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, in the internal lottery, (BB) has been elected, but at the end of the game where the special role (BB) has been missed, the display of the preparation screen and the non-inside inside suggestion image on the liquid crystal display 51 is ended, and the preparation is being made. And the normal effect is started on the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal performance, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a normal performance screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character strolling around the city) displayed in a non-AT state in which the AT control described later is not performed. , Produce effects according to the progress of the game. By making the transition from the preparation effect to the normal effect, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 side has shifted to the normal state in which the gaming state is inside, that is, the medal payout rate becomes the payout rate as designed (hereinafter, referred to as the game payout rate). It may be called an internal suggestion).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is not in the interior and has been shifted to the special state based on the command received from the main control unit 41 in the state where the preparation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, That is, at the end of the game where the special role (BB) is won by the internal lottery and the special role (BB) wins, the display of the non-internal inside suggestion image is ended while the display of the preparation screen is continued. Control the production to continue during preparation. Then, it is controlled based on a command received from the main control unit 41 so that the display of the non-inside inside suggestion image is resumed by specifying that the special state is ended and the state is shifted to the inside. Thereafter, control is performed so that the preparation effect is continued until it is determined that the gaming state has been shifted to the inside.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section, wins the AT lottery in the game in the advantageous section and shifts to the AT state, and further starts a predetermined start condition in the subsequent games. When established, advantageous section notification is started. As described above, in the non-inside, the transition is made to the advantageous section. However, since the end condition 3 is satisfied in the first game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated in the advantageous section in the non-inside. The notification start condition is not satisfied and advantageous section notification is not performed. Also, in order for the favorable section notification start condition to be satisfied, at least two games (a game in which the AT lottery is performed and a game in which the navigation target role is won) are required after the transition to the advantageous section, the internal start Sometimes, even if the zone is shifted to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous zone notification is not performed. In other words, when the sub-control unit 91 changes the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 from the preparation effect to the normal effect, and it is suggested that the game state has shifted to the inside, the advantageous section notification is performed. No, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is maintained in the off state (see FIG. 9A).

  In this way, the sub-control unit 91 starts the normal effect while the preparation effect that is performed when being controlled in the non-internal state is ended when the non-internal state is shifted to the internal state, By performing control so that the normal production is performed without performing the production in preparation when being controlled in, the inside production is completed and the normal production is started. This is a configuration for executing an internal suggestion indicating that the internal transition has been made. As a result, when a transition from non-internal to internal is performed, the internal control by the sub-control unit 91 is executed, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate in the situation where a game is played on the game store side. Can be identified.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 displays an internal medium suggestion indicating that the game state has been transferred to the inside by ending the preparation effect at the end of the game in which the game state has been transferred from the non-inside to the inside. This can be done using the device 51. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can perform advantageous section notification using the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. The position where the internal suggestion is executed is different from the position where the advantageous section notification is executed, and the timing when the internal suggestion is executed is different from the timing when the advantageous section notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding of the suggestion that the inside has become inside due to the inside suggestion and the suggestion that it has shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 can cause the liquid crystal display 51 to display a screen for preparation and a non-internal inside suggestion image in the preparation effect, and the gaming state controlled on the main control unit 41 side is displayed. When it is not inside, it displays the in-preparation screen and the non-inside inside suggestion image to indicate that the game is being prepared and that the game state is controlled to the inside, and the main control unit When the game state controlled on the 41 side is not in a non-inside state but in a special state, the non-inside inside suggestion image is not displayed, but only the in-preparation image is displayed, and the game is being prepared. And it is suggested that the gaming state is controlled to a special state. Thereby, after it is specified that the RAM clear is performed on the main control unit 41 side, it is specified that the gaming state has not yet been transferred to the inside and is controlled to be inside. When the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory until the inside of the game machine until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, the game machine is in a non-internal state before the internal state, It can be recognized whether it is a special state before becoming. Further, in such a situation, by displaying the screen during preparation and the non-inside inside suggestion image by the preparation during preparation, even if a special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery, the special combination It is possible to suggest that it is possible to make the inside where the payout rate of medals is appropriate by performing the operation mode in which (BB) is difficult to win. Further, in such a situation, it is possible to suggest that it is not necessary to play the game in the special operation mode until the special state is ended by not displaying the non-inside inside suggestion image by the preparation effect.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state in which the navigation notification is performed when the inside is controlled to the advantageous section, and first performs the navigation notification after the transition to the advantageous section. By controlling to notify the advantageous section in the game, it is possible to execute the advantageous section notification when it is controlled to the advantageous section in the inside, but it is advantageous when it is controlled to the advantageous section in the inside. It is the structure which does not perform area alerting | reporting. As a result, in the configuration where the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate, it is controlled to the advantageous section. In this case, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but when the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the advantageous section notification is not executed when the merit payout rate is controlled in the non-inside, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where a game is played on the game store side until the inside becomes, an unnecessary advantageous section notification is not executed.

  It should be noted that the preparation effect may be any that suggests that at least the main control unit 41 side has not shifted to the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate, and only the preparation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It may be configured to display.

  In addition, internal suggestion can indicate that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in a situation where at least the game store side plays until the payout rate of the medal is appropriate. In other words, a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51 or an effect of controlling a specific LED to be in a lighting state during a period controlled inside the main control unit 41 side. In addition, the specific sound may be output from the speakers 53 and 54, while the specific effect is not performed in the non-internally controlled period. While performing a specific effect, the structure which does not perform the specific effect may be sufficient in the period controlled inside. In these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-internal to the internal in the situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. is there.

  In addition, internal suggestion can indicate that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in a situation where at least the game store side plays until the payout rate of the medal is appropriate. If the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to be non-internal on the main control unit 41 side at the time of activation, the sub-control unit 91 performs a non-internal / internal display effect in the non-internal, and from the non-internal After the transition to the inside, a configuration in which the non-internal display effect is not performed may be employed even when the transition to the non-inside is performed again. In such a configuration, after the situation where the game shop side plays a game until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, unnecessary internal suggestion is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the internal medium suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub control unit 91, but the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform the internal medium suggestion. For example, when the main control unit 41 includes an LED indicator that suggests that the main control unit 41 is not inside or inside, and the LED display is not inside. It is possible to adopt a configuration that suggests that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling the light to be turned off when the inside is inside, or the lighting state when the LED indicator is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling to be turned off when it is not inside. Moreover, in the structure provided with the LED display which suggests that the main control part 41 is not inside or inside, the indicator (for example, credit display) which performs the said LED indicator other than an inside suggestion etc. It may be configured in common with a segment or the like that displays “.” In the display unit 11, or may be configured as a dedicated display unit that performs only internal suggestion.

  Next, advantageous section notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the advantageous section notification LED 12a, navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12, and AT confirmation notification performed by the sub-control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51, The AT effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the main control unit 41 performs AT lottery when the game state is controlled inside and the game section is controlled as an advantageous section, and the AT lottery is performed. By winning the game, it is then shifted to the AT state where the AT is controlled. After the transition to the AT state, the stop switches 8L and 8C are at the start of the game where the navigation target combination is won first by the internal lottery and after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated. , The advantageous section notification is started during the period before the operation of 8R is activated, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, then the navigation notification is executed and the navigation assistance display 12 is given the navigation number. Control to display.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 wins the AT lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that the AT lottery has been won and the timing for shifting to the AT state. Further, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, when performing the navigation notification, a command capable of specifying the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the AT confirmation that the main control unit 41 has confirmed that the AT is controlled, and the AT effect that suggests that it is controlled to the AT state, It is possible to perform a navigation effect suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the fact that the AT lottery is won is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is specified that the AT lottery is won. AT is determined at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, at the end of the game one game before the AT state is started) during the period from when the AT state is entered to when the state is shifted to the AT state in response to the winning of the AT lottery Notification. In the AT confirmation notification, an AT confirmation notification screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image of “AT determination!”) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and controlled by the AT on the main control unit 41 side. To the effect that it has been confirmed.

  Then, a predetermined timing during the period from when the AT confirmation notification is performed until the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state (in this embodiment, at the start of the game in which the AT state is started (the game is At the time of operation of the start switch 7 for starting))), the normal effect is changed to the AT effect. In the AT effect, an AT effect screen (in the present embodiment, an image showing a character flying in outer space) having an effect mode different from the normal effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the main control unit 41 side is displayed. This suggests that it is controlled to the AT state.

  Thereafter, when it is specified that navigation notification is performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, a navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification (for example, a navigation indicating a middle left stop operation) Displaying the image (see FIG. 7) on the liquid crystal display 51 suggests an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, after being controlled inside, the main control unit 41 starts the advantageous section notification at the start of the game in which the transition to the advantageous section, the transition to the AT state, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, it is notified that the advantageous section has been shifted to the advantageous section. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform the preparation effect on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game state is controlled to the non-internal state on the main control unit 41 side, and performs the preparation effect. At the end of the game in which the game state is shifted from non-internal to internal, the game state is changed from non-internal to internal by changing the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 from the preparation effect to the normal effect. It is suggested to have moved in.

  That is, while the liquid crystal display 51 suggests that the gaming state has been shifted to the inside, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the gaming auxiliary display 12) suggests that the gaming state has been shifted to the advantageous section. The suggestion that it has been transferred to the inside and the suggestion that it has been transferred to the advantageous section are performed at different points (displays). In addition, the indication that the gaming state has been transferred to the inside is that at the end of the game in which the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery in the non-inside, the fact that it has been transferred to the advantageous section Is suggested at the beginning of the game where the start condition of the advantageous section notification is satisfied. The suggestion that the inside has been shifted to the inside and the suggestion that the advantageous section has been shifted to the advantageous section are in one game. Are performed at different timings.

[Advantageous section notification in error state and setting confirmation state]
The advantageous section notification in the error state and the setting confirmation state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the control of the advantageous section notification, the main control unit 41 continuously controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state without turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a during the notification period for controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state. When displaying the medal payout number, error code, navigation number, etc. on the game auxiliary display 12 during the notification period, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (with the corresponding segments of the respective indicators 12L, 12R for displaying these indications) Both the eighth segment of the right side display 12R are controlled to be in the lighting state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 can control to an error state that disables the progress of the game by detecting the occurrence of an error in the slot machine 1. When the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, when the error section is controlled based on the occurrence of the error, In addition, while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state, the control is performed so as to display an error code that can identify the type of the error that has occurred using the other segments of the game auxiliary display 12. Then, the error state is canceled by a predetermined operation, and the error state is ended, and the display of the error code is ended. Even after the error state is ended, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be lit until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before the control of the error state.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is in a normal state where the main control unit 41 side is not controlled to an error state or a setting confirmation state described later, an effect image according to a control state related to a gaming section or AT described later, For example, when the control state related to AT, which will be described later, is a non-AT state, a normal effect screen that is mainly displayed in the non-AT state (in this embodiment, an image showing a character strolling around the city) is displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an effect according to the progress of the game is performed. On the other hand, in the period in which the occurrence of an error is detected on the main control unit 41 side and is controlled to be in an error state, the main control unit 41 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to an advantageous section. An error screen (in this embodiment, a character image and an error code) showing an error code that can identify the type of error that triggered the error state on the side, and information related to the error (for example, a canceling method) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 so as to indicate that the error state is controlled.

  As described above, when the main control unit 41 is controlling to the advantageous section and controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, if the main control unit 41 shifts to the error state that disables the progress of the game, Since an error code that can identify the error state is displayed on the auxiliary indicator 12 and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be kept in the lighting state, the error state is set based on the display content of the game auxiliary indicator 12. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is controlled and that it is controlled in the advantageous section. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize the state of the gaming machine before shifting to the error state.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, when the main control section 41 shifts to the error state, an error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in an advantageous section, while controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in a lighting state. Since information related to the information (for example, the release method) is controlled to be suggested using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like, the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is displayed in a state where the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to prevent the user from misidentifying that the game is controlled in an advantageous section in which a game can be performed based on the contents of the effect.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the main control unit 41 detects an operation of turning on the setting key switch 37 by a predetermined key operation in a state where the game is not being performed. The setting check state is entered to disable the progress of the game, and the setting value display 24 is controlled to display the setting value currently set in the slot machine 1, and then the setting key is operated by a predetermined key operation. By detecting an operation to turn off the switch 37, the setting confirmation state can be ended, the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state. Sometimes, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state even during the setting confirmation state, while the set value indicator 2 Performs control to display the set value (not shown). Then, even after the setting confirmation state is ended, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before the transition to the setting confirmation state.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the sub-control unit 91 is in a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 side is in a normal state that is not controlled to the setting confirmation state or the error state described above. An image showing a character strolling around the city) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to produce an effect according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, in the period controlled by the main control unit 41 to the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 side does not suggest that it is controlled to the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation state screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image indicating the setting confirmation state) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and controlled to the setting confirmation state. Control to suggest.

  Thus, when the main control unit 41 is controlling to the advantageous section and controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, the main control unit 41 disables the progress of the game and is currently set in the set value display 24. Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be kept in the lighting state when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the set value is displayed, the advantageous section is controlled based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. The player can recognize that it is. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize the state of the gaming machine before shifting to the setting confirmation state.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, when the main control section 41 shifts to the setting confirmation state, the set value display 24 (not shown). While displaying the set value and controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be kept in the lighting state, the sub-control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous section, Control is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to indicate that it is in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is misunderstood that the game is controlled to an advantageous zone in which a game can be performed based on the contents of the performance by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like while the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. Can be prevented.

[Resume order of advantageous section notifications and navigation notifications, etc. when power is restored]
The restarting order of advantageous section notification and navigation notification when returning from the power interruption after the power interruption to stop power supply to the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the AC 100V power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes a power interruption process (not shown) in the timer interrupt process, and the main control unit 41 before the power interruption and the RAM 41c Since the data set in the predetermined area is saved in the storage area of the RAM 41c backed up by the backup power supply, and the backup power is supplied, the data is held. When the power supply to is resumed, it is possible to return to the control state before the power interruption. In particular, whether or not the navigation notification was performed in the control state before the power interruption, the content of the navigation notification when the navigation notification was performed, whether or not it was controlled in the advantageous section, and whether or not the stop operation was effective Can be identified.

  Moreover, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes the power interruption process in the same manner as the main control unit 41, so that the control state of each rendering device before the power supply is stopped Is stored in the storage means that is backed up by the backup power source, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, each rendering device can be returned to the control state before the power interruption. . In particular, in the control state before the power supply is stopped, whether or not the navigation effect is performed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the content of the navigation effect can be specified when the navigation effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and the AT is controlled, and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is displayed. While the lighting state is controlled, navigation notification is performed and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Further, when at least one reel is controlled to rotate after the game is started, the stop effective LED of the corresponding reel is controlled to be lit. At this time, a navigation effect is performed on the sub-control unit 91 side, and a navigation image suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and a power interruption occurs, as shown in FIG. 11B, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary indicator 12, the stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C 22R and the liquid crystal display 51 are all turned off, and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and restarted, the main control unit 41 first before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. The rotation control of the reel that has been controlled to rotate is restarted (not shown), and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped, and then the timer interrupt process is performed. The display of the operation mode of the stop switch by the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 and the lighting control of the advantageous section notification LED 12a are restarted at the same time to restart the navigation notification and the advantageous section notification.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the main control unit 41 sets the stop switch corresponding to the reel for which the rotation control is performed by rotating all the reels whose rotation control is resumed at a constant speed. The lighting control of the stop valid LED is resumed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11E, the main control unit 41 resumes reel rotation control, navigation notification, advantageous section notification, and stop effective LED lighting control. By identifying that the return processing of the navigation is completed, the sub-control unit 91 resumes the control of the navigation effect, and the navigation image suggesting the operation mode notified by the navigation notification on the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. Resume display.

  Thereby, the control state of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop valid LED, the reel, and the liquid crystal display 51 is returned to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. .

  As described above, when the navigation notification and the navigation effect are performed in the advantageous section, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, so that the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is changed. When returning to the state before the power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 controls to restart the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 at the same time. Thereby, before the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is resumed, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 is resumed, and the advantageous section notification does not notify that the advantageous section is an advantageous section. The navigation notification can be prevented from being resumed.

  In this embodiment, when the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect in the advantageous section is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on and the navigation notification display on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. However, after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is restarted, the navigation notification display on the game auxiliary display 12 may be restarted. In such a configuration, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is advantageous. It is possible to prevent the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 from being restarted before the section notification is restarted.

  Control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main processing]
The main control unit 41 is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and executes various processes in accordance with programs stored in the ROM 41b. After the startup, first, the startup setting process is executed to initialize the internal register, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the predetermined output port, and the like included in the main control unit 41, and then the main process is executed. The main process is a process repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of game.

  Hereinafter, the control content of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the main process, first, a game start waiting process (Sa1) to be described later that waits until a game is started is executed. Thereafter, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery is executed when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game (Sa2).

  In the internal lottery process, whether or not a prize is awarded to each lottery role that is a lottery target of the internal lottery based on the random number value for internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is operated in step Sa1 ( That is, a process of determining whether or not to permit derivation of a predetermined display result is performed. And the winning number which can specify which lottery object combination (including a loser) is won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Each lottery role is assigned a role number in advance, and if any lottery role is won in the internal lottery, the winning lottery role number is set as the winning number. In the case where it is desired to win also the lottery subject, that is, in the case of losing, 0 is set as the winning number.

  And after performing the internal lottery process in the step of Sa2, the after-mentioned ball control process which performs the process regarding a game area is performed (Sa3). Thereafter, a reel control process for controlling to rotate and stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed (Sa4).

  In the reel control process, after the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to rotate at a predetermined rotational speed, and then the stop switches 8L, 8C, Control is performed to stop the corresponding reel in accordance with the operation of 8R. Further, the reel control process ends when stop control for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R ends, and when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released (stop switch pressing operation is ended). Is done.

  In the reel control process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate, and then all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, so that the left / middle / right / stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are controlled to be lit. To do. Thereafter, when the stop switch is operated for the rotating reel, the stop valid LED of the corresponding stop switch is controlled to be turned off.

  In the reel control processing, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. To determine whether or not a prize has occurred. If a winning has occurred, a winning flag that can identify the winning combination in which the winning has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, after the reel control process is executed in the step of Sa4, an AT state management process (to be described later) for performing a process related to the end of the advantageous section is executed (Sa5). Thereafter, a medal payout process, which will be described later, is executed to perform a process related to payout of medals in accordance with the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game (Sa6). After that, when a re-game player wins, a re-game operation process described later is performed to perform a process of giving a re-game (Sa7).

  After executing the re-game operation process in the step of Sa7, the advantageous section notification flag is set by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the payout control process in the Sa3 step (Sa8). It is determined whether or not (Sa9).

  If it is determined in the step Sa9 that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state control data (light-off) for controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the unlit state is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the main CPU 41a). In the accumulator register or the like) (Sa10), and the right side display of the game auxiliary display 12 in the output buffer provided for each output port in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with the state control data (off) of the predetermined register. It is set to an output buffer corresponding to an output port that outputs a control signal to the eighth segment in 12R (hereinafter also referred to as an advantageous section notification LED output buffer) (Sa11). Then, a single interrupt process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is performed once (Sa12), and the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed by the LED dynamic display process described later executed in the timer interrupt process. The eighth segment, that is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sa13. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Sa9 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the process proceeds to the step Sa13 without performing the processes in steps Sa10 to Sa12.

  When waiting for an interrupt once at the step of Sa12, or when it is determined that the advantageous section notification flag is set at the step of Sa9, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized at the end of the game. A game end setting process for setting is executed (Sa13). In the game end setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data used only for the game (for example, data indicating the winning result of the general combination in the internal lottery) is stored is set as an initialization target. In addition, when the special role is won in the game and the control of the special state is started, or when the control of the special state is ended, data relating to the special state (for example, data indicating the type of the special state, A predetermined area of the RAM 41c where data for counting the number of medals paid out in a special state is stored as an initialization target. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as the initialization target is initialized at the start of the next game by the above-described game start waiting process.

  After the game end setting process is executed in step Sa13, the process returns to step Sa1 and steps Sa1 to Sa13 are repeated. When the main process is completed, the process related to the control of one unit of game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

  In the main process, a predetermined command is generated according to the progress of the game, set in the command queue, and the process of transmitting the command to the sub-control unit 91 is appropriately executed.

  Further, in the main processing of this embodiment, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section notification LED output buffer is provided every time the game for which the advantageous section notification flag is not set. However, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is in the lit state, the output for the advantageous section notification LED is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which state control data (light-off) is set in the buffer. In such a configuration, only when the advantageous section notification flag is not set and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is in the lit state, the state control data (turned off) is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer. Thus, the process of turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Thus, in the main process, when the advantageous section notification flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) is output to the output buffer. When the state control data (lighting) is set and the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. By setting control data (extinguishment) and controlling the lighting state of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state, navigation notification is first performed after the beginning of the advantageous section, and the payout rate (number of payouts / number of bets) The advantageous section notification LED 12a is lit for a period from the start of the game where the game can exceed 100% to the end of the game where the advantageous section is ended. By controlling the state, it is adapted to notify the subject that are controlled advantageously section.

  Further, in the main process, after executing predetermined processes including a game start waiting process and a reel control process, if the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state control data (lights off) is output to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. ) And the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. The reel control process is ended when the third stop operation is ended (the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released), and is advantageous after the third stop operation is ended. The section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. Then, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off, the game end time setting process is executed, and the process returns to the game start waiting process of the first step, thereby completing the main process. That is, in the main process, after the third stop operation in the game is ended, the control for switching the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state within the period from the start of the game start waiting process for the next game. Can be done.

  Also, in the main process, after the internal lottery process is performed, the reel control process is performed during the reel control process, and it is controlled in the advantageous section, and the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. Since the state control data (lighting) is set in the section notification LED output buffer and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, the game is started when a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. After the start switch 7 for starting is operated, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for stopping the reels becomes effective, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, and The section notification LED 12a informs that it is controlling to the advantageous section.

  In the main process, after performing the reel control process and the re-game operation process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section notification flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section notification flag is not set. In this case, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off by setting the state control data in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer so that the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. At the end of the game in which at least one of the end condition 2 and the end condition 3 is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended.

[About the game waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game start waiting process, first, the value of the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into a predetermined register, and the replay medal counter is initialized and set to 0. (Sb1). In the replay medal counter, a new game is played when a regame player wins and a regame is awarded in the previous game by the regame operation process in the main process related to the previous game. Therefore, a numerical value (3 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the prescribed number of bets necessary for this is set. On the other hand, when no replay is given in the previous game, the value (0) at the time of initialization in the step of Sb1 is maintained.

  Then, based on the value read into the predetermined register in the step of Sb1, it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter is greater than 0 (Sb2). If it is determined in step Sb2 that the value of the replay medal counter is greater than 0, that is, if a regame is awarded in the previous game, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Sb3).

  In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the replay medal counter read into the predetermined register in the step Sb1 is set as the betting number, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lit state, and the prescribed number (this embodiment) Then, control is performed so as to notify that the number of bets 3) is set. When setting the bet number, 1 is subtracted from the value of the predetermined register in which the value of the replay medal counter is read in the step of Sb1, 1 is added to the bet number, and 1 corresponding to the bet number after the addition is added. After setting the 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state, the process of controlling the corresponding 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing is repeated until the value of the replay medal counter becomes 0. When the value of the replay medal counter becomes 0, the process of setting the bet number is finished, and every time the bet number is incremented by 1, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. It is controlled sequentially. In addition, the value of the replay medal counter is added to the number of bets at once, all the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lighting state, and the 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which all of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are simultaneously controlled to be lit in one timer interrupt process.

  After the medal insertion execution process is performed in step Sb3, a medal care permission setting process is performed (Sb4). If it is determined in step Sb2 that the value of the replay medal counter is not greater than 0, that is, if no replay is given in the previous game, the process in step Sb3 is not executed. Proceeding to step Sb4, medal care permission setting processing is performed.

  In the medal care permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to. If the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) and there is a vacant credit, Referring to the set bet value, if the bet value has not reached the specified number (3 in the present embodiment) and there is a vacant bet number, A medal care permission flag indicating permission to insert medals is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, in the medal care permission setting process, the medal care permission flag is set when there is a vacant credit regardless of whether or not a replay is given. Is granted, even if there is a vacancy in the credit, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set and there is a vacancy in the number of bets, or if there is a vacancy in the credit and no replay is granted The medal care permission flag may be set.

  After the medal care permission setting process is performed in the step of Sb4, a process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sb5). By performing the process of waiting for one interrupt, the timer interrupt process is performed, and the detection state of various switches, the lighting state of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection state of these various switches is updated. Then, the subsequent processing (for example, medal detection processing and operation input acceptance processing described later) can be performed.

  After a single interrupt process is performed in step Sb5 and a timer interrupt is performed once, the medal care permission flag is set by the medal care permission setting process described above with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether a maintenance permission flag is set (Sb6).

  If it is determined in step Sb6 that the medal care permission flag is set, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state (energized state) (Sb7). By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state, the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the hopper tank side, and the medal is controlled to be taken into the slot machine 1. Further, the lighting mode of the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state (Sb8), and control is performed so as to notify that the medal can be inserted. In addition, after setting the lighting mode of the input request LED 17 to the lighting state, the timer interrupt process is executed, and the LED dynamic display process is performed, whereby the input request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  Then, after setting the insertion request LED 17 in the lighting state in the step Sb8, a medal detection process is performed (Sb9). If it is determined that the medal care permission flag is not set in step Sb6, the process proceeds to step Sb9 without performing the processes in steps Sb7 and Sb8, and the medal detection process is performed.

  In the medal detection process, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the transition of the output signal of the inserted medal sensor 31 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal insertion signal) or the medal insertion signal. The medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the insertion signal. Then, when the insertion of a normal medal is detected, processing for setting a bet amount and receiving a medal for credit is performed. On the other hand, when the insertion of an abnormal medal is detected, an error process for controlling the error state to disable the progress of the game is performed. The error state is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38. Note that when the error state is canceled, the abnormality that caused the error state to be controlled (for example, a medal clogging within the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31) has not been resolved, again, It will be controlled to an error state.

  After performing the medal detection process in the step of Sb9, the operation input receiving process for receiving the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the operation of various switches and performing the operation of the switch for which the operation is enabled. (Sb10).

  In the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal and the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more, the operation is accepted by the MAXBET switch 6. Enable. Further, when a medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, if the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is validated. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

  Further, in the operation input reception process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. Thereafter, by setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state (non-energized state), the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the inserted medals are replaced by the player. Control to return to. Further, when an operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected in a state where the operation by the setting key switch 37 is valid, a setting value display process for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when an operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, a settlement process is performed in which the medals stored in the credit are returned to the player. In addition, when an operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected in a state where the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, the number of medals up to a prescribed number is set as the bet number within a possible range based on the credit, and the bet number is set. A process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switch in which the operation is detected, the operation input receiving process is terminated.

  After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Sb10, it is determined whether an effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Sb11). If the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and it is determined that a valid operation by the start switch 7 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step Sb12 and a start valid LED display process for controlling the lighting mode of the start valid LED 18 is performed. Perform (Sb12).

  In the start valid LED display process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective by the operation input reception process in step Sb10, the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected. In the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective while the lighting state is set, the operation by the switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected, and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective. If there is not, the start valid LED 18 is set to the off state. Thereby, when the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, the start switch 7 is controlled by turning on the start valid LED 18. Notify that the operation by is effective. In addition, when the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state, but the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or when the operation by the start switch 7 is not set to be effective, the start is effective. By controlling the LED 18 to be turned off, it is notified that the operation by the start switch 7 is invalid.

  After the start valid LED display process is performed in the step Sb12, the process returns to the step Sb5, and the processes in the steps Sb5 to Sb12 are repeated until it is determined that a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected in the step Sb11. Do. After the start valid LED display process is performed in the step Sb12, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to the lighting mode set by the start valid LED display process by performing a one-time interruption process in the step Sb5. It becomes.

  In step Sb11, when it is determined that a start flag is set in the predetermined register and a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and the predetermined value in the RAM 41c is acquired. An area is set (Sb13). Thereafter, the start valid LED 18 and the insertion request LED 17 are set to the off state (Sb14, Sb15), the medal care permission flag is cleared from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb16), and the payout number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared. (Sb17), the game start waiting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Thereafter, in the main process, the internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery using the random number for internal lottery acquired in the step of Sb13 and the operation of the start switch 7 are detected, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R One game is started by performing a reel control process for starting rotation and stopping the corresponding reel in response to detection of an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Thus, in the game start waiting process, when a re-game is given, the medal insertion execution process is executed, the bet number for performing the re-game is set, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. Control sequentially.

  In the game start waiting process, the medal care permission flag is set, and when at least one of the credits or the bet number is free and a medal can be inserted, the flow of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 The flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in an ON state so that the path is switched to the hopper tank side, and the lighting mode of the input request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  Also, in the game start waiting process, when the start valid LED display process is performed, the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated. While the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be lit, the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state, but when the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or the operation by the start switch 7 is effective. If not set, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be turned off.

  Further, in the game start waiting process, when the valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected by the operation input acceptance process, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are set to the off state, and the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Is set to clear, the timer interruption process is performed thereafter, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are controlled to be turned off, and the payout number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased. Become.

  In the game start waiting process, after the medal insertion execution process (Sb3) is performed, a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17 can be performed. The number of bets is set in accordance with the re-granting, and after the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled to be lit, the insertion request LED 17 is controlled to be lit.

  In the game start waiting process, in the series of processes (Sb6 to Sb12) after the interrupt once waiting process (Sb5) is performed, a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the input request LED 17 is performed, and further the start valid Since it is possible to perform the LED display process (Sb12), the timer interrupt process after the process of setting the lighting state of these input request LEDs 17 (Sb8) and the start valid LED display process (Sb12) is performed. The request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 can be controlled to be lit at the same time.

[About the ball control process]
The control content of the ball control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout control process, first, section information that can specify the currently controlled game section is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc1). The section information is an initial value indicating that the currently controlled gaming section is a normal section, and the advantageous section is determined by the corresponding process of the game control process and the AT state management process described later. It can be updated to the indicated value.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section based on the section information acquired in the step of Sc1 (Sc2). When it is determined in the step of Sc2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, it is referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to determine which internal lottery target combination (including a loser) is won in the internal lottery. An identifiable winning number is acquired (Sc3), and it is determined whether or not an advantageous section transition lottery target for performing an advantageous section transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section has been won (Sc4). Each internal lottery target that is subject to lottery in the internal lottery is assigned a role number in advance, and among the internal lottery target roles, a role number within a predetermined range is preassigned. It has been. Based on whether or not the role number of the internal lottery target specified based on the winning number is a value within a predetermined range, it is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous segment transition lottery target is won. ing.

  Then, when it is determined in the step of Sc4 that the winning section transition lottery target role is won, an advantageous section transition lottery process for performing the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (Sc5). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to win the advantageous section shift lottery and shift to the advantageous section (Sc6). If it is determined in the step of Sc6 that the advantageous section shift lottery has been won, the section information update data (advantage section) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc7), and the update data ( Section information is updated to a value indicating the advantageous section using (favorable section) (Sc8). Thus, based on the section information (value indicating the advantageous section) updated in the game, the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game, and the advantageous section game described later with the next game as the first game of the advantageous section. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted by the number counter.

  Then, an advantageous section start time setting process is performed for setting related to the advantageous section that is started when the advantageous section shift lottery is won (Sc9). In the advantageous section start time setting process, processing for initializing advantageous section ending conditions (such as arbitrary termination conditions) to be started in accordance with the type of winning section to be selected for the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. A process for setting a lottery table used for AT lottery, a process for setting various counters used in the advantageous section, and the like are performed.

  And after performing the advantageous section start time setting process in the step of Sc9, the ball exit control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, in the step of Sc4, when it is determined that the advantageous section transition lottery target is not won based on the winning number, in the step of Sc6, when it is determined that the advantageous section transition lottery is not won, Sc5 Without performing each process of the step of Sc9, the exit control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sc2 that the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section, the number of games that are continuously controlled to the advantageous section (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advantageous section game number) is calculated. In order to count, 1 is added to the advantageous section game number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc10), and then the ball appearance state information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (the control state related to the currently controlled AT) Based on the information that can be specified), the currently controlled ball status (control status related to AT) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc11), and processing related to the currently controlled ball status is executed. The appearance state related process is performed (Sc12).

  In the ball appearance state-related processing, processing related to the ball appearance state acquired in the predetermined register at the start of the processing, that is, the currently controlled ball appearance state is performed. The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to a non-AT state, a precursor state, and an AT state as a ball appearance state (control state related to AT), and a predetermined transition condition is established in the ball appearance state related process. Thus, the current control state is terminated, and control is performed so as to shift to the control state according to the established transition condition. In addition, various processes are performed according to the currently controlled payout state (see FIG. 23 and the like).

  Further, in the game appearance state related process, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game. An arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag indicating that 3) is satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the non-inside while the gaming state is controlled, the next game of the game that has been transferred to the advantageous zone, that is, one of the advantageous intervals in the non-inside In the game, control is performed to end the advantageous section.

  Also, in the game appearance state related processing, as will be described later, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification start condition for starting the advantageous section notification described above is satisfied (in this embodiment, the advantageous section After the start of the advantageous section, the game is controlled to the AT state first, and in the AT state, in the AT state, the navigation target role is first won by the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed by the AT control. First, the navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section notification flag indicating that the advantageous section notification is to be started is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) starts 100%). Then, control is performed so as to start the control of the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

  After the appearance state related process is performed in the step of Sc12, is the arbitrary end condition establishment flag set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the arbitrary end condition establishment flag can be set by the appearance state related process? It is determined whether or not the arbitrary end condition is satisfied based on whether or not (Sc13). If the arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag is set, and it is determined that the arbitrary end condition is satisfied, an advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sc14), and an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is ended is displayed. A predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set.

  Then, after the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed in the step of Sc14, is the advantageous section notification flag set by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the appearance state related process? It is determined whether or not (Sc15). If it is determined in the step of Sc13 that the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of the step of Sc14 is not performed and the process of the step of Sc15 is performed, and the advantageous section notification flag is set. Is determined (Sc15).

  If it is determined in step Sc15 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the state control data (lighting) for controlling the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state is read into a predetermined register. (Sc16) After the state control data (lighting) of the predetermined register is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer (Sc17), the process waits for one interrupt (Sc18) and is executed in the timer interrupt process. By the LED dynamic display process described later, the display mode of the eighth segment, that is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be in the lighting state. Thereafter, an instruction setting process for setting the navigation notification is performed (Sc19). On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sc15 that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to the step of Sc19 without performing each process in the steps of Sc16 to Sc18 (Sc19).

  In the instruction setting process, when it is determined that the control state related to the AT (the ball-out state) is controlled to the AT state, and the winning role is selected in the internal lottery, and that the navigation lottery is specified. The navigation notification corresponding to the navigation target role is executed, and the operation modes (for example, the pressing order, the operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player according to the navigation target role are displayed as game assists. Control is performed so that a command capable of specifying the operation mode is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. On the other hand, when the control state related to the AT is not controlled to the AT state, the stop switch 8L, 8C, which is advantageous to the player, is not executed even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. Control is performed so that a command capable of specifying the 8R operation mode is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  Then, after performing the instruction setting process in the step of Sc19, the present ball control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  In this way, in the ball exit control process, control is performed in the advantageous section, and when the predetermined advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the state control data (lighting) is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer. Since the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on at the start of the game satisfying the advantageous section notification start condition, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a controls the advantageous section. It can be notified that it has been.

  Further, in the game playing control process, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, 1 is always added to the advantageous section game number counter for each game, and the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted. Thereby, in the AT state management process described later, based on the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined that the number of games played in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). In such a case, the advantageous section is controlled to end, so that the advantageous section does not exceed the upper limit number of games and it is possible to prevent the long-term medal payout rate from becoming excessive.

  In the payout control process of this embodiment, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, that is, after the start of the advantageous section, the navigation notification is performed first, and the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) is 100%. The advantageous section notification is controlled so as to start the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of a game that can be exceeded, but the advantageous section notification is first performed after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. It may be configured to start at a predetermined timing in a period until a game in which the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) can exceed 100% after the notification is made. For example, after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section The advantageous section notification is started by a configuration in which the advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game, or after a predetermined number of games are performed after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. Configurations, after the game section is shifted from the normal interval Advantageously interval, a predetermined symbol combination reel 2L predetermined, 2C, may be configured such that advantageously interval notification by stopping the 2R is started.

  Further, in the payout control process of the present embodiment, the advantageous section notification is performed at the beginning of the game where the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section and the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) can exceed 100%. It is configured to start and end with the end of the advantageous section, but the advantageous section notification is that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in a period from the start of the advantageous section to the end of the advantageous section (for example, The configuration may be such that it can be temporarily terminated when the AT state is terminated.

  In the exit control process, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the end condition 3 of the advantageous section is satisfied. By determining and controlling to end the advantageous section at the end of the game, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside. As a result, when the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and when the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous interval is Since the advantageous section is terminated in the game that has been started, even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the inside where the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate, before the player plays the game The advantageous section will end, and the game will not be played by the player in the advantageous section, that is, the state that has been shifted to the advantageous state at the game store side, so the fairness is lost when the player plays the game Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to terminate the advantageous section when it is established that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit as the advantageous section termination condition. In such a configuration, if the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, and the advantageous section is not ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, the advantageous section transferred in the non-inside is in the inside. Will continue even after the transition. Then, in the advantageous section transferred to the inside, the number of games that can be played in the inside until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is less than the advantageous section transferred in the inside. The game will be reduced by the number of games played in the interior, and if a player plays a game in an advantageous section that has been transferred to the inside, the fairness will be lost. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the advantageous section has started, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. Even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store side plays until it becomes inside, the advantageous section ends before the player plays a game, and the fairness is lost when the player plays the game Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the game. By controlling so that the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, but the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started. For example, only in the first game in the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal, and if it is determined that it is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. A configuration for controlling the section to end may also be used.

[About AT status management processing]
The control contents of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the AT state management process, first, section information set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in a predetermined register (Sd1). Then, based on the section information, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section (Sd2).

  If it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section, the advantageous section is referred to by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag can be set by the above-mentioned ball control process. It is determined whether or not an end flag is set (Sd3). If it is determined in step Sd3 that the advantageous section end flag has not been set, refer to the advantageous section game number counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is updated in the above-described play control process ( Sd4) Based on the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) (Sd5).

  If it is determined in step Sd5 that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit, the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (paid in the advantageous section). Refer to the net increase counter for counting the total number of medals issued by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets in the advantageous section (Sd6). The value is acquired in a predetermined register as a net increase number value. Then, the payout number value of medals to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag of the game, and the payout number value is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register (Sd7). Thereafter, the bet value set in the game is specified, and a new net increase value is calculated by subtracting the bet value from the net increase value in the predetermined register (Sd8). Then, it is determined whether or not the new net increment value calculated in the predetermined register is 0 or more (Sd9).

  If it is determined in step Sd9 that the value of the net increase in the predetermined register is not 0 or more, the value of the net increase in the predetermined register is set to 0 (Sd10), and the process proceeds to step Sd11. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the net increment value in the predetermined register is 0 or more, the processing in step Sd10 is not performed, the net increment value in the predetermined register is maintained, and the process proceeds to step Sd11. .

  In the step of Sd11, the net increase value set in the predetermined register is set to the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum value (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number 2400), and It is determined whether or not the maximum number (three) used for setting the number of bets has been exceeded)) (Sd11). In the step of Sd11, when it is determined that the net increase number value of the predetermined register does not exceed the specified number, the net increase number value of the predetermined register is set in the net increase number counter of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, thereby the net increase number counter. Is updated to a new net increase number value (Sd12).

  After updating the net increment counter in step Sd12 to a new net increment value, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Also, if it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Sd3 that the advantageous section end flag is set, if it is determined in the step Sd5 that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit, the medal in the advantageous section is determined in the step Sd11. When it is determined that the net increase number exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sd13, and a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored is initialized to select the advantageous section. An advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) to be ended is performed.

  In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of storage areas (2 in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c to be initialized by the process is set in the predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization areas (Sd13). . The RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, the number of included addresses) correspond to the values indicated by the number of sections. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the set table is stored is set in a predetermined register (HL) (Sd14). Thereafter, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses of the initialization target area is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the head address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is obtained as the initialization target RAM address. The predetermined register (C) is set (Sd15).

  After the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C) is set in the predetermined area. By setting the initialization data set in the register (A), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sd17). Thereafter, the value of the predetermined register (C) is incremented by 1 to advance the initialization target RAM address by 1 (Sd18).

  Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), after subtracting 1 from the number of remaining addresses (Sd19), it is determined whether the number of remaining addresses is greater than 0 (Sd20). If it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than zero, the process returns to step Sd17, and the processes in steps Sd17 to Sd20 are repeated until the number of remaining addresses becomes zero. As a result, the storage area corresponding to the number of storage areas to be initialized (number of addresses) from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is the initialization data. It is initialized.

  When it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining addresses is not larger than 0, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the value of the predetermined register (D) 1 is subtracted from the value indicated by the number of sections in the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sd21), and it is determined whether the value indicated by the number of sections after the subtraction is 0 (Sd22). If the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sd15, and the number of storage areas to be initialized next is acquired from the RAM initialization table based on the value indicated by the number of partitions, and the initialization target The number of addresses in the area is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections in the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the RAM initialization table. After setting the initialization target RAM address in the predetermined register (C) (Sd15), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), and each of the steps of Sd16 to Sd20 is performed. By repeatedly performing the processing until the number of addresses becomes 0, the storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of storage areas of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating each process in the steps Sd15 to Sd22 until the number of storage areas becomes zero, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of sections is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of storage areas in the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and the predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section in the RAM 41c is stored by the advantageous section data initialization process. Is initialized, the data related to the control in the advantageous section and the data related to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

  In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas in the two predetermined sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. The RAM 41c may be configured to initialize one predetermined storage area or three or more storage areas.

  As described above, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the advantageous section is being controlled, the storage area of the RAM 41c is increased along with the termination of the advantageous section control. An advantageous section data initialization process for initializing a predetermined area in which data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored is executed, and control is performed so as to terminate the control of the advantageous section.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 sets an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when an arbitrary end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the above-described play control process. . Then, in the AT state management process, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag is set by the payout control process, if the advantageous section end flag is set, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed. If the advantage section end flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games is determined. When it is determined that has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to terminate the control of the advantageous section, and the arbitrary termination condition is satisfied in the ball control process In this case, by referring to the advantageous section end flag, it is possible to omit the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and to finish the control of the advantageous section. It has become way.

  In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) when controlled in the advantageous section. If it is determined based on the value of the section game number counter and the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initial is set without setting the advantageous section end flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Control is performed so that the control of the advantageous section is terminated. The advantageous section end condition is changed to the advantageous section game, which is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The end condition may be satisfied when the number exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

  In this embodiment, when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the payout control process, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then the advantageous section end flag is set in the AT state management process. On the other hand, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to control the advantageous section to be ended, while the AT state management process determines the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in advance. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed without setting the advantageous section end flag, and the control of the advantageous section is ended. However, even when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball exit control process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in the AT state management process is determined by a predetermined upper limit game. When the advantageous section end condition is satisfied by reaching the number of times, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section end flag is set, so that the advantageous section is set. A configuration for executing data initialization processing may also be used.

  In the AT state management process, when an advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a prescribed number Then, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the advantageous section (including data related to the AT state), thereby terminating the advantageous section.

  In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section is terminated. By setting the prescribed number to the predetermined number, the advantage over the predetermined number of games can be obtained. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the medal payout rate in the section is within a predetermined ratio. For example, the specified number is 2388 (a value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the payout number in the slot machine 1 from 2400 as the upper limit number and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number) ), The net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section can be made 2400 or less, and the medal payout rate between 1600 games can be made within 150%. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of medals from being paid out in the slot machine 1 in a predetermined period. It should be noted that the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is replaced with an end condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment). The same applies to the case where the end condition is reached by reaching the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number (2389 in this embodiment). Note that the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced with the end condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment). The completion condition may be reached when the net increase in the number of medals reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to a predetermined number (2389 in this embodiment).

  In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. When the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is terminated to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long time, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number When the number exceeds the upper limit, the AT state and the advantageous section are terminated to prevent the advantageous section from continuing when the payout rate increases rapidly even when the number of advantageous section games does not reach the upper limit number of games. It is like that.

  In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section data is initialized and the advantageous section is terminated. First, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). If it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section Advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) without performing the process of counting the number of sheets (Sd6 to Sd10) and the process of determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (Sd11). I do. As a result, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied because the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section, is set to the prescribed number. Since the process for determining exceeding (Sd11) and the process (Sd6 to Sd10) for counting the net increase in number of medals that are initialized at the end of the advantageous section are not performed, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the AT state management process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. If it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit number of games while determining whether the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the prescribed number In this configuration (Sd11), first, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the prescribed number. If it is determined that the net increase has exceeded the prescribed number, the advantageous zone is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that the net increase number does not exceed the prescribed number while the process to be ended is performed, it may be determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. In such a configuration, as a result of the slot machine 1 design, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as a condition for ending the advantageous section as compared to the number of advantageous section games reaching the upper limit number of games. In a configuration in which it is easy to establish, it is possible to preferentially determine whether or not the net increase in number of medals, which is an end condition that is highly likely to be satisfied, exceeds a specified number, and when the end condition is satisfied, the other end The processing burden can be reduced without determining the conditions.

  In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). If it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, It is determined whether or not the net increased number of medals exceeds a specified number (Sd11), and if it is determined that the net increased number of medals exceeds a specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to be advantageous. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games while controlling to end the section, a process (Sd11) is performed for determining whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds a prescribed number. The advantage section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to control the end of the advantage section, and the advantage section game number reaches the upper limit game number. Even when one of the cases where the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number is established, or when both are established in the same game, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed. ) To finish the advantageous section. As a result, either of the cases where both the fact that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number are simultaneously established as the conditions for ending the advantageous section. The advantageous section can be terminated by performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same region is initialized without difference from the case where only the above is established.

  In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). If it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, It is determined whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds a specified number (Sd11). If it is determined that the number of net increase in medals exceeds a specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to be advantageous. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games while the section is controlled to end, a process (Sd11) is performed to determine whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds a specified number. If the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed and the advantageous section is controlled to end, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. , Even if the net increase number of medals in the preferred interval exceeds a predetermined number, it is configured to terminate advantageously section performs common advantageously section data initialization processing (Sd13~Sd22). As a result, the common advantageous section data is set regardless of whether the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number as the end condition of the advantageous section. Since the initialization process is performed, the advantageous section can be terminated by performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same area is initialized without any difference.

  In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the value of the net increase number counter is acquired as a net increase number value in a predetermined register, the payout number value is added to the net increase number value, and the bet value is subtracted. When the value obtained in this way is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, so that the increase / decrease number of medals tends to decrease as shown in FIGS. When the value is smaller than the reference value (the value of the net increase at the start of the advantageous zone (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase counter is 0, and when the increase / decrease in the number of medals is increasing, the increase tends to increase. The increment / decrement number after that becomes the value of the net increment counter.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), after the shift to the advantageous section, navigation notification is not performed, and the number of medals increases and decreases, and the net increase number is increased by adding the increase / decrease number to the net increase counter. When the value of the counter is less than the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0 over a period in which the increase / decrease number of medals is below the initial value. After that, when the AT state is controlled and the stop operation is performed according to the navigation notification so that the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, the value of the net increase counter is a value corresponding to the net increase number of medals ( The value obtained by subtracting the betting value from the payout number value) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase counter is the reference value when the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increase tendency, that is, when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value. It is a value indicating the number of sheets increased from the value.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, after the number of medals increased or decreased once exceeds the initial value of the net increase counter, it tends to decrease and again falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment). In such a case, the number of medals increases or decreases to 0 over a period in which the number of medals is less than the initial value. Thereafter, as the number of medals increases / decreases, the value of the net increase counter is updated by sequentially adding a value corresponding to the net increase of medals (a value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number). Thereby, the value of the net increase counter is a value indicating the increase from the reference value, with the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value as a reference value. .

  In the AT state management process, an arithmetic value obtained by adding the payout number of medals in the game to the net increase counter value and subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase counter value in the advantageous section is 0. If it is larger, the value obtained by adding the payout number value to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value is set and updated in the net increase number counter, while if the calculated value is smaller than 0, When the process of setting and updating 0 in the net increase number counter is performed every game, and the net increase number becomes a negative value in the advantageous section, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0 and the net increase number is counted again from 0. The net increase counter is updated so that the number of medals increases (net increase) in the transition of the actual increase / decrease number of medals in the advantageous section. It is possible to identify directly as counter value (see FIG. 16 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the net increment counter is updated when it is in the advantageous zone, so that the counting of the net increase in medals is started after the transition to the advantageous zone, and the net increase in the advantageous zone is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net increase number counter is not performed when the AT state is not in the advantageous section, and the processing for updating the net increase number counter is performed when the AT state is in the advantageous section. good. Even in such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not performed because the AT state is not performed, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase and the navigation notification is performed in the AT state, so that the net increase in the number of medals increases. Similarly to the configuration for performing the process of updating the net increase counter when it is in the middle, it is possible to count the net increase of medals in the advantageous section.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), for example, in a period in which navigation notification is not performed after the transition to the advantageous section, a payout rate exceeding 1 does not occur, and the number of medals increases or decreases to a reference value. If it changes to be lower, the number of medals increases and decreases from the game in which the transition to the advantageous section and the transition to the AT state and navigation notification is started, and the net increase in the advantageous section in the game. Is the least. In addition, even when the navigation notification is not performed after the shift to the advantageous section, a payout with a payout rate exceeding 1 may occur. If a payout with a payout rate exceeding 1 occurs during the period so that the increase / decrease in the number of medals during the period is monotonously increasing, the net increase in the advantaged section will be The least. In addition, if the payout rate exceeds 1 in that period so that the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase after the increase / decrease number of medals once falls below the reference value in that period, In this game, the net increase in the advantageous section is the smallest. Thus, the point in time when the number of net increase is the smallest in the advantageous section can change depending on the situation. In contrast, in the process of updating the medal net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment obtains the value of the net increase number counter as a net increase number value in a predetermined register, and pays out the sheet to the net increase number value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical value and subtracting the betting value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, so that the number of medals increased / decreased from decreasing to increasing The net increment counter is reset and the net increment value is counted again from 0, and the net increment number is counted from the point where the net increment number is the smallest in the advantageous section, and the correct net increment number is counted. Can be done.

  Further, in this embodiment, by performing a process for updating the net increase counter when it is in the advantageous zone, the counting of the net increase in medals is started from the time of shifting to the advantageous zone, and the net increase in the advantageous zone is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, a configuration in which the process of updating the net increase number counter may be performed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or not. In such a configuration, when the net increase in medals tends to increase in the section before the transition to the advantageous section, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted by taking over the net increase in medals in the section. Can be done.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate can be set to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification. The stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification, so that the medal payout rate is less than 1, and in the AT state, According to the navigation notification, the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase. On the other hand, the increase / decrease number of medals tends to decrease in states other than the AT state. Thus, the fact that the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase in the advantageous section is notified.

  In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to initialize the advantageous section (including the data related to the AT state) to thereby determine the advantageous section. In the configuration to be terminated, that is, the AT state management process, regardless of the termination conditions of the established advantageous section, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the data related to the advantageous section in the same manner, and the advantageous section is terminated. However, at the end of the advantageous section, the data related to the advantageous section according to the end condition of the established advantageous section is initialized. To, may be configured to terminate the advantageous period.

  In the present embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. If a predetermined small combination with a payout of a prize is won, regardless of whether the predetermined small combination is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game, the predetermined small combination is won and the medal is paid out. It may be considered that the number of medals for the advantageous section is counted by adding the amount of medals to be paid out to the net increase counter. In such a configuration, when a predetermined small combination is won by an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is considered that the predetermined small combination has won and a medal has been paid out, and the medals for the payout are counted as a net increase number counter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the net increase counter from intentionally extending the number of games in the advantageous section without causing the net increase counter to exceed the specified number by intentionally missing the predetermined small combination.

  In addition, when a predetermined small role is won in the internal lottery, the predetermined small role is won and the medal is awarded regardless of whether the predetermined small role is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game. In a configuration that counts the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase counter, assuming that the medals have been paid out, a lottery that includes a small part with a medal payout in an internal lottery Regardless of whether or not the player is able to win the small role when the target role is won, if the small role wins, the payout will be made by winning the small role. In addition to adding the number of medals to the net increase counter, it is possible for a player to win a prize for a prize when a lottery target part including a small part with a medal payout is won in an internal lottery. The situation Regardless, if the winning combination could not be won, for example, an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the player by winning the navigation target role as a lottery target role in the internal lottery, Although being notified, it is possible to win a predetermined small combination included in the navigation target combination, but a predetermined small combination is won by being operated in an operation mode different from the notified operation mode. If a specific small role is won and it is operated in a certain operation mode (operation at the operation timing that will be the drawing range of the specific role, etc.), the specific small role can be awarded. Despite this, if a specific small role could not be won by operating in an operation mode other than a certain mode of operation, the small role that the player was able to win Assuming that a medal has been paid out after winning a prize, the number of medals that are paid out is added to the net increase counter, so that the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted, while medals are paid out in an internal lottery. When a lottery role including a small role is won, if the player cannot win a prize in a situation where it is impossible for the player to win the small role reliably, for example, an internal lottery In a situation where the navigation target combination is won and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which is advantageous to the player through the navigation notification, is not notified, the predetermined small combination included in the navigation target combination can be won. If not, it is preferable not to add to the net increase number counter, and this configuration ensures that the player can increase medals reliably. If the situation is not possible, the net increase counter is added only when the number of medals actually increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In this embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter to set the bet amount. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used in the above is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0. In the case of being less than 0, the numerical value below 0 is not counted, and only the numerical value exceeding 0 is counted, but after the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous section, When a medal is paid out in the advantageous section, the value of the number of medals paid out is added to the net increase counter, and when the medal is used for setting the bet number, By repeatedly performing the process of subtracting the minute value from the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted to count whether the increase / decrease number of medals is below 0 or above 0 But it ’s okay. In such a configuration, when the increase / decrease number of medals is less than 0, the net increase counter is not corrected to 0, so that the process of counting the net increase by the net increase counter can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medal payouts paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the medals used for setting the bet number When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of 1 is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and when the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase number counter. By controlling so that the value of the net increase counter is updated so as to be the value of the value, the net increase in the number of medals is counted starting from when the net increase in medals has decreased most after the start of the advantageous section. Since the timing at which the net increase in medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section can vary depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals identified based on the net increase counter in this embodiment depends on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 starts counting the number of net increase of medals by the net increase number counter from the time when it is uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, and A configuration may also be adopted in which the net increase in medals up to now as the starting point is counted, and the advantageous section is terminated when the net increase in medals exceeds a specified number.

  For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval when the net increase in medals exceeds a specified number As a configuration for ending, the counting by the net increase counter is started from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is the specified number. When it exceeds, the structure which terminates an advantageous area may be sufficient. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase of medals starting from other than when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made Therefore, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the above, so that the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter can be simplified.

  Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it is suggested that the transition to the AT state is made by the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and when the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by the navigation notification, The configuration may be such that when the net increase in the number of medals as the starting point exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a changes the advantageous section to the advantageous section. It is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from other than when the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification, and it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section. Control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter can be simplified.

  In addition, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals until the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, it is suggested that the transition to the AT state is performed by the advantageous section notification LED 12a regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by the navigation notification after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. If the net increase in the number of medals up to the present time starting from the current time exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be shifted to. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the medals by navigation notification Regardless of whether the mode is notified or not, there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a point other than when the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the transition to the advantageous section is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

  In this embodiment, the AT state management process is configured to control the end of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Without counting the number of medals used for setting the number, only the number of medals to be paid out in each game is counted, and the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined prescribed number. The configuration may be controlled as described above. For example, the specified number of payouts is 2865 (a net increase (2400) where the payout rate of medals between 1600 games is 150%) and the shortest number of games (160 games = 2400/1) to which the net increase is given. Based on the sum of the number of medals used for setting the number of bets (480 = 160 games x the specified number of 3 per game) in the maximum number of payouts per game (15)) By subtracting the maximum number (15) of the number of sheets), the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. The maximum net increase in medals to be paid out in 1600 can be less than 2400, and the medal payout rate between 1600 games should be within 150% It can be. It should be noted that the same effect can be obtained even if the advantageous section is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (the specified number + 1).

[About medal payout processing]
The details of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the medal payout process, first, a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in a predetermined register (Se1), and a winning number / payout number command setting process is performed (Se2). In the winning number / payout number command setting process, a winning combination identified based on a winning flag set and acquired in a predetermined register is paid out along with a winning number that can identify the winning combination and winning of the winning combination. The command queue is set so that a command capable of specifying the number of medals is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Note that the commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by timer interrupt processing.

  After performing the winning number / payout number command setting process in the Se2 step, the medal payout number to be paid out with the winning of the winning combination specified based on the winning flag obtained in the Se1 step is acquired (Se3). The medal payout number is set as a remaining number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se4).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of sheets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 0 (Se5), and when it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is not 0, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, The credit counter that can identify the number of credits is referred to (Se6), and it is determined whether or not the credit has reached the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (Se7). .

  If it is determined in step Se7 that the credit has not reached the upper limit, the value of the credit counter is incremented by 1 (Se8), and a medal payout process is performed (Se9). In the medal payout process, based on the value of the credit counter, data for displaying a value corresponding to the value of the credit counter is set in the output buffer of the credit indicator 11, and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The number of remaining medals is subtracted by 1, the number of medals set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is added to the number of medals that can be specified, and a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out after addition is displayed. Processing for setting the data to be executed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. The initial value of the number of paid-out medals is 0, and the number of paid-out medals is initialized at the end of one game.

  After performing the medal payout process in the Se9 step, a credit payout interval waiting process is performed (Se10). In the credit payout interval waiting process, a predetermined waiting time (in this embodiment, a time during which a player or the like can visually recognize changes in the display contents of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, for example, one medal) The payout interval waiting process is terminated when the waiting time elapses for about 0.16 seconds for each payout. By performing a credit payout interval waiting process, a timer interrupt process is performed during a predetermined waiting time, and the display modes of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 correspond to the data set in each output buffer. It will be updated to the display mode. Further, the value of the credit counter updated by the medal payout process and the number of paid-out medals are displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 for at least a predetermined waiting time. A player or the like can visually recognize a change in the display content of the display 12.

  After performing the credit payout interval waiting process in the Se10 step, the process returns to the Se5 step, and the processes in the Se5 to Se10 steps are repeated until the remaining number set in the RAM 41c becomes zero. If it is determined in step Se5 that the remaining number is zero, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  If it is determined in step Se7 that the credit has reached the upper limit based on the credit counter, a hopper payout process is performed (Se11). In the hopper payout process, the hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven, and every time the payout sensor of the hopper unit 35 detects the payout of one medal, the remaining number set in the RAM 41c is decremented by 1, and the payout has been completed. After adding 1 to the number of medals, the process of setting the data for displaying the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is repeated until the remaining number becomes 0. . Thus, every time a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 35, the display of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. Then, when the remaining number is 0, the hopper motor is stopped and the hopper payout process is ended.

  After performing the hopper payout process in the step of Se11, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  In this way, in the medal payout process, when a winning of a small role occurs, and there is a vacant credit, the number of medals paid out with the winning of the small role is added to the credit within the range up to the upper limit of the credit. When there is no available credit, the number of medals that could not be added to the credit is paid out from the hopper unit through the medal payout opening 9.

  Also, in the medal payout process, when a prize for a small role occurs and a medal is paid out to the credit, every time one medal is added to the credit, the medal payout process is performed and the number of paid-out medals is displayed. After the data to be executed is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the timer interruption process is performed by performing the credit payout interval waiting process, and the data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Based on the data, the display of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is updated, and the display on the game auxiliary indicator 12 is maintained in an updated state until a predetermined waiting time elapses. Repeat. As a result, when a prize for a small role occurs and medals are paid out to credits, the display of the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially performed over a predetermined time (the number of medals paid out to the credits × waiting time). Updated.

  Further, in the medal payout process, when a small role winning is generated and the medal is paid out from the hopper unit, the hopper payout process is performed, and a predetermined time corresponding to the number of medals paid out (for example, 100 ms per medal) The hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven over and the data for displaying the number of medals paid out is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 every time the payout sensor detects the payout of one medal. To do. Then, the timer interruption process is performed during the time corresponding to the number of paid-out medals, so that the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated based on the data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Accordingly, the display of the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated over time corresponding to the medal payout number.

[Processing during re-game operation]
The control contents of the re-game operation process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the re-game operation process, first, a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sf1), and it is determined whether or not the re-game player has won a prize based on the winning flag. Determine (Sf2).

  If it is determined in step Sf2 that the re-game player has won, a re-game operating flag that can specify that the re-game is to be operated in the next game is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf 3). The medal counter setting process is performed (Sf4). In the replay medal counter setting process, the specified number of bets in the game is specified, and the specified number of bets in the game as a replay medal is stored in the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A minute value (3 in this embodiment) is set.

  After the replay medal counter setting process is performed in the step of Sf4, the lighting mode of the replaying LED 20 is set to the lighting state (Sf5), and an interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sf6). In step Sf6, by performing the interrupt once waiting process, the timer interrupt process is executed, the LED dynamic display process is performed, and the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  After the waiting process for one interrupt is performed in step Sf6, the re-game operation process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in step Sf2 that the re-game player has not won based on the winning flag, the re-game operation process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Thus, in the re-game operation process, when the re-game player wins in the game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit.

  In the re-game activation process, when a re-game player wins in the game, a re-game medal counter is set in the re-game medal counter so that the re-game can be performed at the start of the game start waiting process in the next game. The medal is set as the bet number, and the specified number of bets is set, so that the replay can be performed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The timer interrupt process is a process performed by the main control unit 41 at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process is set to a time longer than the combined time of the process that repeats depending on the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process. The process repeated according to the control state is always completed with the timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the timer interrupt process includes an LED dynamic display process, and the LED dynamic display process is executed every time the timer interrupt process is performed.

  In the LED dynamic display processing, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED 18, waiting LED 19, replaying Control for setting a lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state of the LED 20 etc. according to the state of the output buffer set by each processing such as the main processing, and transmitting the lighting signal to the lighting control circuit of the display such as various LEDs Etc. By performing the LED dynamic display process, the indicators such as various LEDs are controlled in a lighting mode according to the data set in the corresponding output buffer.

  In the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, although not particularly shown, a power interruption determination process for detecting the occurrence of power interruption (power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped) Data set in a predetermined area of the register of the control unit 41 and the RAM 41c is backed up by a backup power source, and even if power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents are preserved as long as power is supplied by the backup power source. Power generation processing for saving to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing for initializing a predetermined output port when the power interruption occurs, and data for identifying the detection status of various switches based on the detection status of the various switches Processing, processing for updating predetermined various timers set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, predetermined external output to the outside of the slot machine 1 A process of transmitting a signal, a process of transmitting various commands set in the command queue, an excitation signal is transmitted to the reel motor 32 of the reel unit 34 according to the progress of the game, etc., thereby driving and stopping each reel. Processes are included, and various processes are executed in a predetermined order.

[Transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator at the start of the advantageous section]
After the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous section notification is started, the gaming auxiliary indicator 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, 1 The transition of the display mode of -3BETLED14-16 is demonstrated based on FIG.

  The main control unit 41 executes the main process described above, and performs a game start waiting process and a ball exit control process, so that at the start of the game, the game auxiliary indicator 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, and the replaying The display modes of the LEDs 20 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, in the game start waiting process, the insertion request LED 17 starts to be lit when there is a vacant credit or bet and it is possible to insert medals. Thereafter, the betting number is set by inserting medals or by operating the MAXBET switch 6, whereby the corresponding 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially turned on. Then, when the specified number of bets is set, the start valid LED 18 is turned on. When the re-gamer wins and the re-game is awarded in the previous game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit for the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

  In this state, when the start switch 7 is operated, the game is started and an internal lottery is performed. Then, in the exit control process, after the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous section notification flag is set, after the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the interrupt is performed. When the waiting process is performed once, lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

  Then, after the interrupt once waiting process is performed, the navigation for displaying the navigation number indicating the operation mode corresponding to the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery is performed by the instruction setting process during the payout control process. The display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, timer interrupt processing is performed, so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 corresponding to the navigation number (3 in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, the first, third, fourth, and left of the left display 12L). , 6 and 7 segments and the fourth segment of the right side display 12R) start to light. That is, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 showing the navigation number is turned on.

  Then, after the exit control process is completed, the reel control process is performed, and after the weight has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate. Will be started.

  Further, the main control unit 41 transmits a command capable of specifying the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification to the sub-control unit 91 when performing the navigation notification in the instruction setting process during the ball exit control process. Control to do. On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 specifies that navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side at the start of the game based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The navigation effect control is executed, and a navigation image suggesting an operation mode suggested by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the sub-control unit 91 may be controlled to the effect that the advantageous section notification is started, that is, the AT state, when it is specified on the main control section 41 side that the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. The AT confirmation notification for notifying the confirmation is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Since the instruction setting process on the main control unit 41 side is performed after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, the navigation effect by the sub control section 91 is performed after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. It becomes.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 performs control so as to start the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied in the ball exit control process performed at the start of the game. At the start of the game where the condition is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on to start the advantageous section notification for notifying that the advantageous section is controlled.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the game auxiliary display device 12 to start displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display device 12 after starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball control process. By the time the navigation notification is started at 12, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to notify that the advantageous section has started.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by performing the reel control process after controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to start the navigation notification in the game control process. After the game is started in response to the operation of the start switch 7, the game auxiliary display 12 starts navigation notification until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate at a constant speed.

  In the present embodiment, in the ball exit control process, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, a waiting process is performed once, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. After that, the instruction setting process is performed to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display. However, in the ball exit control process, after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, the subsequent process is determined in advance. A configuration may be adopted in which a delay process for intentionally delaying for a predetermined period is performed, and when the predetermined period has elapsed, an instruction setting process is performed to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the sub-control unit 91 to perform AT confirmation notification informing that it is determined to be controlled to the AT state within a predetermined period during which delay processing is performed. After the AT confirmation notification is performed, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform an instruction setting process after starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a and control to start the navigation notification in the exit control process. In the ball control process, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, the instruction setting process is performed in the reel control process, and the navigation notification is started when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started. But it ’s okay. In such a configuration, at the start of the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, and then a predetermined period of weight, that is, a predetermined period from the start of the previous game has elapsed. When this is done, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started. When a predetermined period of weight has elapsed at the start of the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are substantially simultaneously with the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. As the rotation starts, the navigation notification navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is started.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform control so as to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball control process. Although the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on at the start of the game in which the notification start condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 performs navigation on the game auxiliary display 12 in the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. At a predetermined timing (for example, when the third stop operation is finished, when the payout of medals is finished, when the grant of replay is finished, etc.) after the notification is started and until the game is finished, The configuration may be such that the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform AT confirmation notification when the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts to be lit on the main control unit 41 side. In the game in which lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started on the 41st side, the AT confirmation notification may be performed at a timing before the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side. . In addition, the sub-control unit 91 has confirmed that the advantageous section notification is started after the AT lottery is won after the transition to the advantageous section based on the command received from the main control section 41. Even in a configuration in which the AT confirmation notification is performed at any timing within the period from when the main control unit 41 is identified until the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, that is, before the AT state is started. good.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the game at which the navigation notification is started, but after determining to shift to the AT state, the navigation notification is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on before the game is started. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 may also be configured to perform AT confirmation notification at a timing when the main control unit 41 starts to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a after it is determined to shift to the AT state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary indicator 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. In the control process, after setting the status control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the process for setting the instruction is performed until the timer interrupt process is performed after the interrupt interrupt process is not performed. When the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the navigation notification data for navigation notification can be set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. In addition, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 may be started simultaneously. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section.

[Transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator at the end of the advantageous section]
The transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When a game section is controlled to an advantageous section, a small role is won by an internal lottery, and a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, and the symbol combination of the small role is assigned to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In the case of stopping, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), after a game is started in an advantageous section and a small role is won in an internal lottery, reel control processing is performed, and when at least one reel is controlled to rotate, The auxiliary display 12 (except for the eighth segment of the right display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. When the re-gamer wins and the re-game is awarded in the previous game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit for the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

  Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended (the press of the stop switch is released) and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels, the AT state Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the gaming section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

  After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the combination of small symbols is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and control is performed so as to pay out a predetermined number (for example, nine) of medals when the small role winning is generated. The number of medals paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereby, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated so as to be counted up to the final value indicating the predetermined number corresponding to the winning small combination. Until the final value of the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, a waiting time when paying out medals to credit or a predetermined time when paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit is displayed. It will be necessary.

  Then, when the payout of a predetermined number of medals according to the winning small combination is completed, the medal payout process is completed, and the process for setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed in the main process. Is called. In this process, based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag has been cleared in the AT state management process described above, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Is performed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

  Thereafter, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

  Then, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to take in the medal. Is set to the ON state, the input request LED 17 is set to ON. Thereafter, when the timer interruption process is performed, lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process.

  As described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small combination is won by the internal lottery and the advantageous combination is shifted to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small combination is the reel 2L, In the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, after the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, the reel control processing is finished. The final value of the number of medals to be paid out by the medal payout process with the winning of the predetermined small role is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process. Is set, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Thereby, the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Further, the turn-on request LED 17 starts to be turned on after the game start waiting process.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small combination is won in the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small combination is reels 2L, 2C, In the case of stopping at 2R, the reel control process is ended when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. By the processing, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process of the game start waiting process performed thereafter. That is, after the reel is stopped in the game, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended in the period from when the settlement operation is accepted.

  Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won in the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small role is the reel 2L, In the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), after the game is started in the advantageous section and the small role is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed, and when at least one reel is controlled to rotate, The auxiliary indicator 12 (except for the eighth segment of the right indicator 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

  Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended (the press of the stop switch is released) and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels, the AT state Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the gaming section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

  After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the small part won in the internal lottery is missed, and a prize accompanying the medal payout does not occur, so that the medal payout control and the control of updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 are not performed. Is finished. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is maintained in the extinguished state.

  Then, after the medal payout process is completed, based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag has been cleared by the AT state management process in the main process, the state control data (turned off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off by setting the timer interruption process after that.

  Thereafter, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

  Then, in the game start waiting process, the medal care permission setting process in the game start waiting process sets the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state so that the medals are taken in on condition that there is a vacant number or credit. After that, the input request LED 17 is set to ON, and lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process.

  As described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won by the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the combination of symbols for the small part is reel 2L. In the case of stopping at 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished, and the reel control processing is finished by stopping the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. After that, the control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not performed by the medal payout process, and the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification is performed. The LED 12a is turned off. Thereby, the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Thereafter, lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the combination of symbols for which the small role is lost is reels 2L, 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the reel control process is finished, By the main processing, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process of the game start waiting process performed thereafter. That is, after the reel is stopped in the game, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended in the period from when the settlement operation is accepted.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won by the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the combination of symbols for the small role is reels 2L, 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the main section of the advantageous section notification LED 12a outputs the control without updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout process. Data for state control (light-off) is set in the buffer, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when a game section is controlled to an advantageous section, a small role is won by an internal lottery, and a transition is made from the advantageous section to the normal section. Is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role by the medal payout process is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. That is, the timing when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is extinguished between when the small combination missing symbol combination stops on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and when the small combination symbol combination stops on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Different.

  Even if the small combination missing symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, or when the small combination symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the main processing causes the advantageous section notification LED 12a to output the buffer. By setting the state control data (off), the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the processing timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is common. However, when the combination of symbols for missing a small part is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the main control display unit 12 is not controlled to display the number of medals to be paid out. When the process sets the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, but the combination of small symbols stops on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel control process is terminated, Further, after the control for displaying the number of medals paid out on the auxiliary game indicator 12 is performed, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main processing. The time interval from the end of the reel control process until the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is different, and the advantageous section notification LED 1 Temporal timing a is turned off it is different.

  Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when a lottery target combination including, for example, re-game players A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section Based on FIG. 22, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a informs that the advantageous section has ended when the symbol combination of the re-combining player A or the re-gaming party B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. explain. Note that the replaying combinations A and B are replaying combinations having different combinations of symbols constituting the combination for at least one reel. Further, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the first operation order, the configuration pattern of the re-gamer A is preferentially stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. By operating in the second operation order other than the first operation mode, the reel stop control is performed so that the configuration symbol of the re-gamer B is preferentially stopped by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the game is started in the advantageous section, and after the lottery target combination including the re-game players A and B is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is controlled to rotate, the game auxiliary indicator 12 (except the eighth segment of the right indicator 12R), the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, and the waiting state The LED 19 and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

  Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended (the press of the stop switch is released) and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels, the AT state Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the gaming section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

  After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the re-gamer A or the symbol combination of the re-gamer B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, control for paying out medals and control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 Will be terminated without performing. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is maintained in the extinguished state.

  Then, after the medal payout process is completed, a re-game operation process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the re-game medal counter, the replaying LED 20 is set to ON, and the replaying LED 20 is lit. Is started.

  Thereafter, in the main process, based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared by the AT state management process, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. By doing so, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

  Thereafter, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

  Based on the fact that the re-game medal counter is set to 1 or more in the game start waiting process, the bet number up to the specified number is set one by one, and 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16 are sequentially set to the ON state. Thus, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is started sequentially. Thereafter, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacant number or credit, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set so that the medal is taken inside. Is set to the ON state, the input request LED 17 is set to ON. Thereafter, when the timer interruption process is performed, lighting of the input request LED 17 is started.

  In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the lottery target combination including the re-gamer A, B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, When the symbol combination of the re-gamer A or the symbol combination of the re-gamer B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and all the reels 2L, 2C After the reel control process is terminated by stopping the rotation of 2R, the replay operation process is performed, and the LED 20 during replay starts to be turned on, and then the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process Is set to state control data (turned off), and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Thereby, the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Furthermore, after the lighting of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started by the game start waiting process, the lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the lottery target combination including the re-game players A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the transition is made from the advantageous section to the normal section, When the symbol combination of the combination A or the combination of the re-playing combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the LED 20 is started to be lit during the re-game operation process. Then, the state control data (light-off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. In other words, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off both when the symbol combination of the replaying combination A is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and when the combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Timing is common.

[About control state transitions related to AT]
A control state related to AT controlled by the main control unit 41 (departing state) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the main control unit 41 can control the non-AT state, the precursor state, and the AT state as the control state related to the AT. Regardless of whether the above gaming state is controlled to the non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB), the non-AT state is only applied when the above gaming segment is controlled to the normal segment. Control. Further, even when the gaming state is non-internal, the special state (BB general, RB) is controlled, and the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, the non-AT state is controlled. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled inside and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, control is made to any one of the non-AT state, the precursor state, and the AT state.

  The non-AT state is a state in which the AT is not controlled and the navigation notification is not performed. In the non-AT state, regardless of whether the game section is controlled as a normal section or an advantageous section, navigation notification is not performed even if the winning role is won in the internal lottery. By not performing the navigation notification, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100% in the non-AT state.

  Also, in the non-AT state, the AT lottery target role (in this embodiment, in the order of pushing) When a small combination 1-6, a specific small combination 1, a specific small combination 2, a replaying combination 1) are won, an AT lottery is performed. At the time of winning the AT lottery, Navistock is given as a right controlled to the AT state.

  In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a navigation stock counter for counting the remaining number of assigned navigation stock, and an AT game number counter for counting the number of remaining AT games to be described later Is set, and when the non-AT state is started, the main control unit 41 initializes the value of the navigation stock counter and the value of the AT game number counter to 0. When the AT lottery is won, the number of assigned navigation stocks is added to the navigation stock counter. Each time the remaining number of navigation stocks counted by the navigation stock counter is decremented by 1, a predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, 30 games) is added to the AT game number counter and controlled to the AT state. The Rukoto.

  In the non-AT state, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the gaming state is not controlled to be inside, that is, the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section. When the state is controlled during non-internal, or when the game section is controlled to the normal section and the game state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the internal lottery Even if the AT lottery target role is won, the AT lottery is not performed and no navigation stock is given. As a result, when the control is performed in the normal section or when the control is performed in the non-internal state, the shift to the AT state is not performed, and the navigation notification is not performed, so that the medal payout rate is 100. % Is not exceeded.

  Further, the non-AT state is terminated at the end of the game in which the AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the state shifts to a precursor state over a predetermined number of games. The number of games controlled to the precursor state is selected and determined by the precursor state lottery from the number of games (5 to 20 games) within a predetermined range at the time of transition to the precursor state. In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main controller 41, a precursor state counter for counting the number of remaining games in the precursor state is set. When the non-AT state is started, the main controller 41 detects the precursor The value of the state counter is initialized to 0, and when the precursor state lottery is performed, the number of games in the precursor state determined by the precursor state lottery is added to the precursor state counter.

  The precursor state is a state that is controlled by winning the AT lottery role in the internal lottery in the non-AT state, and is a state in which navigation notification can be performed. In the precursor state, when a navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combination 1 to 6 in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, a navigation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform navigation notification with a predetermined probability. By winning the navigation lottery, the navigation notification is controlled. In the navigation lottery in the precursor state, it is determined that the navigation notification is performed so that the navigation notification is performed at a frequency at which the payout rate of the medals (the number of payouts / the number of bets) in the precursor state is about 100%. ing. As a result, in the precursor state, when the navigation notification is performed, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, so that they are included in the winning push order small combination. The winning combination for increasing the medal among the winning combinations to be won can be won, and the medal payout rate can be set to about 100%.

  In the present embodiment, in the precursor state, navigation notification is performed with a frequency that the medal payout rate is about 100% when the winning combination of the navigation target is won, and the AT state (low probability) is controlled. Thus, the number of medals possessed by the player does not substantially increase or decrease from the start time at the end of the AT state (low probability), and the number of medals at the start time is maintained. The number of medals possessed by the player may be increased or decreased from the start time at the end of the precursor state. In such a configuration, the medal increase / decrease rate in the precursor state is preferably within a range from the increase / decrease rate in the non-AT state to the increase / decrease rate in the AT state.

  In the precursor state, after the above-described gaming section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification control is performed and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started in the game in which the navigation notification is performed first. And the said advantageous area alerting | reporting LED12a will be continuously controlled to a lighting state until the advantageous area is complete | finished.

  In each game in the precursor state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the precursor state counter described above is zero. If the counter value is not 0, the counter value is subtracted by 1 until the end of the game, and control is performed so that the precursor state is maintained in the next game. On the other hand, when the value of the counter is 0, it is determined by referring to the navigation stock counter whether or not the remaining number of allocated navigation stock is 1 or more. If it is determined that the remaining number of navigation stock is 1 or more, the value of the navigation stock counter is decremented by 1, and a predetermined number of games (30 games in this embodiment) is added to the above-mentioned AT game number counter. Then, control is performed to end the precursor state and shift to the AT state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of navigation stocks is not 1 or more, control is performed so as to end the precursor state and shift to the non-AT state.

  The AT state is a state in which navigation stock is consumed and controlled, and it is possible to perform AT control and navigation notification can be performed. In the AT state, the navigation lottery for determining whether or not to perform the navigation notification is performed in the internal lottery when the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combinations 1 to 6) is won, as in the warning state. It is performed, and it is controlled so that navigation notification is performed by winning the navigation lottery. In the navigation lottery in the AT state, it is always determined that the navigation notification is performed at a frequency of 100% when the navigation target role is selected. As a result, in the AT state, navigation notification is always performed when the winning combination is selected. Then, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, the winning combination that increases the medal among the winning combinations included in the winning push order small combination is awarded. Thus, the medal payout rate can be set to a predetermined payout rate exceeding 100% (for example, about 200% to about 260% (3 to 5 in net increase per game)).

  In each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the aforementioned AT game number counter is zero. If the counter value is not 0, at the end of the game, 1 is subtracted from the counter value to control to maintain the AT state. On the other hand, when the value of the counter is 0, it is determined by referring to the navigation stock counter whether the remaining number of navigation stock is 1 or more. If it is determined that the remaining number of navigation stock is 1 or more, the value of the navigation stock counter is decremented by 1, and a predetermined number of games (30 games in this embodiment) is added to the above-mentioned AT game number counter. Then, control is continued in the AT state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of navigation stocks is not 1 or more, control is performed so as to end the AT state and shift to the non-AT state.

  In the AT state, when an AT lottery target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combinations 1 to 6, specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2, replaying combination 1) is won in the internal lottery, Make a lottery. Then, by winning the AT lottery, a predetermined number of navigation stocks are given, and the given navigation stock number is added to the navigation stock counter. By adding the remaining number of navigation stocks in the AT state, the number of games controlled by the AT is added.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 can control a plurality of types of states including the non-AT state and the AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state as the control state related to the AT. It is possible to digest Navistock, which is the right to be controlled, and control it to the AT state.

  In this embodiment, as the right controlled by the AT, the navigation stock controlled in the AT state is applied for a predetermined period, but as the right controlled by the AT, the number of games controlled by the AT, the navigation A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times of notification is applied and the like is digested to control the AT state.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 can alert | report the correct pushing order when the push order small part with which the operation mode (correct answer pushing order) of stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R which a medal increases by internal lottery wins is elected. Navigation notification can be executed, and in the navigation notification control, the correct push order can be notified in the AT state. In the AT state, the correct push order is notified by the navigation notification more frequently than in the non-AT state. This configuration is more advantageous for the player than the non-AT state.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls to the AT state, the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment), or the medal in the advantageous section When the net increase number exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment), a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment (120 games for the number of AT games and about 360 for the net increase in medals)) The ending state (advantageous section) is performed by performing the ending control to continue the AT state until the end of the advantageous section and to end the AT state at the end of the advantageous section The state is controlled to the AT state until either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied).

  In the present embodiment, the AT state is continued until the ending state is given special navigation stock by the main control unit 41, that is, until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. The number of navigation stocks (number of AT games) required to be added to the navigation stock counter is such that the AT state is continued until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. When the main control unit 41 is controlling to the AT state, the advantageous section game number reaches the first predetermined value, or the medal net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value. Regardless of the number of remaining navigation stocks or the number of remaining AT games, the AT state is continuously controlled until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. It may be in the state.

  Specifically, in the ending control, a special grant flag that can specify whether or not special grant for specially giving navigation stock has been performed is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In each game in the AT state, the advantageous section game number counter in the RAM 41c is referred to at the start of the game, and whether the current advantageous section game number is the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) or not. Determine. When the number of advantageous section games is the first predetermined value, that is, when it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value in the game, the special grant flag is referred to By controlling to perform special grant on the condition that it is not performed, by adding a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) of navigation stock and adding it to the navigation stock counter, The number of AT games is increased so that the AT state is continued until the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit value at which the end condition 1 is satisfied. Further, when the special grant is performed, the special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been performed.

  Further, in each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 refers to the net increase number counter of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, and the net increase number of medals in the current advantageous section is a second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). ) Is exceeded. Then, when the net medal increase number exceeds the second predetermined value, the special grant flag is referred to and control is performed so that the special grant is performed on the condition that the special grant is not specified. By adding a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) of navigation stock and adding it to the navigation stock counter, the AT state is continued until the net number of medals reaches the specified number that satisfies the end condition 2. Increase the number of AT games as shown. Further, when the special grant is performed, the special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been performed.

  As described above, in the ending control, in the AT state, the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (this implementation). In the example, by giving Navistock specially on the condition that it exceeds 2088), the number of AT games more than the difference game number from the current advantageous section game number to the upper limit game number is added, Alternatively, when the number of AT games that can obtain a net increase number equal to or more than the difference from the current medal net increase number to the specified number is added, and thereafter, the favorable section end condition 1 or end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, Control is performed so that the AT state is continued until the advantageous section is terminated.

[Directions related to AT]
The effects related to AT performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main control unit 41 can transmit various commands that can specify the control status and the like on the main control unit 41 side to the sub-control unit 91 according to the progress status of the game. A command that can identify the progress status of the game, a command that can identify the currently controlled gaming section, a command that can identify the control state related to the currently controlled AT, and a navigation that is notified by the navigation notification when performing navigation notification A command that can specify a number, a command that can specify whether or not the above-mentioned special provision of navigation stock has been performed, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 according to the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform control based on the command received from the main control unit 41 so as to perform various effects according to the progress status and control state of the specified game. For example, when the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state on the main control unit 41 side, control is performed so as to perform an AT effect that suggests that the AT state is controlled, and the main control unit 41 side When the navigation notification is performed, control is performed so as to perform the above-described navigation effect that notifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 establishes at least one end condition among the above-described end conditions 1 and 2 for the advantageous section controlled on the main control unit 41 side based on the command received from the main control unit 41 side. When it is specified that the situation is close, control is performed so as to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is close, and when it is specified that the advantageous section has ended, Control is performed so that a post-notification for notifying that the advantageous section reaches the upper limit and is terminated and that information related to the advantageous section is initialized is performed for a predetermined period from the game in which the advantageous section is terminated.

  In the AT effect, while suggesting that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the AT state (normal) and suggesting that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the AT state, An AT effect (ending) indicating that the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in an ending state is included.

  The sub-control unit 91 is a case where it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment). And the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment), that is, the ending control has not yet been performed, and the navigation stock has been given specially. If not, control is performed so that the AT effect (ordinary) is performed until a start condition for the later-described AT effect (ending) is satisfied. On the other hand, when it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or When the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment), that is, the ending control is performed and the special provision of the navigation stock is performed, the AT effect ( After the start condition of the ending is established, control is performed so as to perform the AT effect (ending).

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 controls the navigation effect when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side while performing the AT effect (normal) or the AT effect (ending). The navigation image (see FIG. 7) for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the AT effect (normal), the AT effect screen to be displayed when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, whereby the AT effect is displayed. It is suggested that the state is controlled. The AT effect screen is specified based on a main effect image of a main effect such as a character image and an AT end condition suggestion image indicating an AT end condition (in this embodiment, a command received from the main control unit 41 side). A number image (for example, 500 games) indicating the number of remaining AT games to be played, and an AT game history image (in this embodiment, controlled to the AT state) indicating a game history (number of AT games, net increase) during the AT. A number image indicating the number of games played (the number of in-AT games), a number image indicating a net increase in number of medals in the AT state (a net increase in AT), and a background image selected from predetermined background images A to C And is mainly composed. Further, in the AT effect screen, similarly to the normal effect screen in the above-described normal effect (not shown), the credit stored in the slot machine 1, the number of medals paid out in the game, and the game are set. An image showing the number of bets is displayed.

  In the AT effect (normal), an image selected by the background lottery from the background images A to C (see FIG. 24B) is displayed as the background image. The background image A (the image of the celestial body A), the background image B (the image of the celestial body B), and the background image C (the image of the celestial body C) are images having different display modes, and when displayed on the AT effect screen, The player can recognize that different background images are displayed.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs a background lottery every time it is specified that an AT lottery that can be newly given a navigation stock has been performed based on a command received from the main control unit 41 side. Control is performed so that the selected background image is displayed on the AT effect screen. In the background lottery, a background image that is one of the background images A, B, and C is selected based on the remaining number of currently assigned navigation stocks that is specified based on a command received from the main control unit 41 side. When the remaining number of navigation stock is 0 to 1, the background image A is selected at the highest rate, and when the remaining number of navigation stock is 2 to 3, the background image B When the selection ratio is the highest and the remaining number of navigation stocks is four or more, the selection ratio of the background image C is set to be the highest. As a result, in the AT effect (normal), the remaining number of navigation stock that is given on the main control unit 41 side and is not consumed is suggested depending on which of the background images A to C is displayed as the background image. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), on the AT effect screen (ending), the AT effect composed of the main effect image, the AT end condition suggestion image, the AT game history image, and the background image, similarly to the AT effect (normal). By displaying the screen on the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the AT state is controlled. The display mode of the main effect image, the AT end condition suggestion image, and the AT game history image is the same as the display mode in the above-described AT effect (normal).

  On the other hand, on the AT effect screen (ending), a background image D (image of the celestial body D) that is not displayed in the AT effect (normal) is displayed as a background image. The background image D is an image having a display mode different from the background images A to C, and the player recognizes that the background image D is displayed as the background image and that the AT effect screen (ending) is performed. Is possible. By performing the AT effect screen (ending), it is suggested that the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the special assignment of the navigation stock is performed, and the advantageous section game number is set to the first predetermined value (the book). In the embodiment, the fact that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is almost satisfied is reached by reaching 1400 games), and the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). This suggests that the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is almost established.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), in the AT end condition suggestion image on the AT effect screen (ending), when the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the AT effect ( When the ending) is started, a numerical image is displayed so as to suggest the difference between the upper limit number of advantageous section games and the current advantageous section number of games that will satisfy the end condition 1 as the number of remaining AT games. indicate. On the other hand, when the AT effect (ending) is started when the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, a character image that does not show a specific numerical value (for example, an image such as “?”). Is displayed in place of a numeric image suggesting the number of remaining AT games (not shown). When the AT effect screen (ending) is started when the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied is uncertain. By not displaying a specific numerical value as the number of remaining AT games in the AT end condition suggestion image, there is a mismatch between the number of remaining AT games suggested by the AT end condition suggestion image and the number of remaining AT games that are actually controlled. This can prevent the player from being confused.

  Note that in the AT end condition suggestion image on the AT effect screen (ending), even when the AT effect (ending) is started when the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the number of medals is increased. Even when the AT effect (ending) is started when the value exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games or the estimated number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied may be displayed. And the structure which does not display the number of games until the completion | finish condition of the said advantageous area is satisfied may be sufficient.

  As shown in FIG. 25B, on the AT effect screen (ending), by displaying an ending state suggestion image (in this example, a character image of “Congratulations!”) In the vicinity of the AT end condition suggestion image, It is controlled to the ending state, and suggests that the AT state is finished with the remaining predetermined number of games.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), on the AT effect screen (ending), an advantageous section end notice image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a prior notice for notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established. Thus, an advantageous section end notice is given to notify that the AT state is terminated when the advantageous section termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous section is terminated and before the AT state is terminated.

  The advantageous section end notice image includes a game number image indicating the difference between the current advantageous section game number and the upper limit number of games, and a number indicating the difference between the current advantageous section net increase number and the prescribed number. An image and a character image suggesting that the AT state is ended when the game is played by the number of games of the difference or when the net number of medals is increased by the number of the difference are included. The advantageous section end notice image is displayed in the display area between the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R switches in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. It becomes easy for a person to recognize.

  In addition, the advantageous section end notice image is controlled to be blinked and displayed by alternately switching between a display state and a non-display state at every predetermined time interval. While the player can recognize the difference number of the difference number of games and the medal net increase number, in the non-display state, the image behind the advantageous section end notice image (in this embodiment, AT game history image) ) Can be recognized.

  Further, in the blinking display control of the advantageous section end notice image, the more the situation where the advantageous section end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is established is relatively close, that is, the difference between the advantageous section game numbers and the net medal increase number. The smaller the number of differences, the farther the favorable section end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is established, that is, the case where the number of advantageous section game differences and the medal net increase are relatively large. Also, the display state and the non-display state of the advantageous section end notice image are switched so that the display state time is long and the non-display state time is short. As a result, the advantageous section end notice image is emphasized and displayed when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are relatively close.

  In the AT effect (ending) of the present embodiment, the character image and the background image different from the AT effect (normal) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest that the ending state is set. In the production (ending), a configuration that suggests the ending state may be displayed by displaying a moving image or an image peculiar to the ending state, for example, an animation moving image related to content corresponding to the model of the slot machine 1.

  Next, the ending suggestion effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 performs ending control when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, or when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value, thereby performing navigation stock. Control to give special grants. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 starts the AT effect (normal) by specifying that the control state related to AT has been shifted to the AT state on the main control unit 41 side, and then performs main control. Control is performed so as to start the above-described AT effect (ending) by specially giving navigation stock on the part 41 side. When the sub-control unit 91 starts an AT effect (ending), an ending suggestion suggesting that the AT effect (ending) is started in a period of a predetermined number of games before the AT effect (ending) is started. It is possible to produce an effect.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to the AT state on the main control unit 41 side based on a command received from the main control unit 41, and the number of advantageous section games is the first predetermined value described above. At the start of a game specified to have reached a third predetermined value (1395 games in this example) before a predetermined number of games (5 games in this example) before (1400 games in this example) Alternatively, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is a predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) from the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). ) The fourth predetermined value (in this embodiment, 2073 in this embodiment) corresponding to the net increase in number (in this embodiment, 15 (in the present embodiment, 5 games x 3 in average value of the net increase)) Games identified as exceeding At the end, the ending suggestion effect has not yet been performed, and the number of remaining AT games (including the number of AT games that can be added by consumption of the given navigation stock) is a predetermined number of games (in this example, 5 games) Control to start the ending suggestion effect on the condition that it is above.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the ending suggestion effect, at the start of a game that is controlled to the AT state and is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value, or in the AT state The liquid crystal display 51 starts displaying the ending suggestion image at the end of the game in which it is controlled and the net increase in medals is specified to exceed the fourth predetermined value. The display of the ending suggestion image is continued until the AT effect (ending) is started.

  In the ending suggestion effect, when the ending suggestion effect is performed when the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value, the remaining number of games until the advantageous section game number reaches the first fixed value is suggested. A number image and a message image that suggests that the AT effect (ending) will start as the remaining number of games progress will be displayed as an ending suggestion image, and the ending suggestion image so that the remaining number of games is counted down each time the game is started Is updated (see FIGS. 26A and 26B). On the other hand, when performing the ending suggestion effect when the medal net increase exceeds the fourth predetermined value, the number image indicating the remaining net increase until the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value and the remaining A message image suggesting that the AT effect (ending) starts when the net increase is increased by the net increase is displayed as an ending suggestion image, and an ending suggestion image is displayed so as to indicate the remaining net increase at the end of the game. Update (not shown).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), it is specified at the start of a game in which it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, or the net medal increase number exceeds the second predetermined value. At the end of the game to be played, that is, when the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation stock is specially given, the ending confirmation notification is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. Display on the instrument 51. In the ending confirmation notification image, a predetermined character image and a message image (in this embodiment, a character image of “ENDING GET !!”) indicating that an AT effect (ending) is to be performed are displayed. ) Is confirmed to be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the state where the ending confirmation notification image is displayed, the bet number for starting the next game is set, and the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Then, after the ending suggestion effect and the AT effect (normal) are ended, the AT effect (ending) is started and the ending start image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the ending start image, the AT effect (ending) is displayed by displaying a predetermined character image and a message image indicating that the AT effect (ending) is started (in this embodiment, a character image of “ENDING START!”). ) Will start.

  The sub-control unit 91 displays the ending start image for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment), ends the display of the ending start image, and then ends the advantageous section. Accordingly, control is performed so that the AT effect (ending) is performed until the AT state is terminated.

  Next, the subsequent notification performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As described above, when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the main control unit 41 causes the advantageous section to increase when the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. When the end condition 2 is established, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and end the AT state. As a result, the data advantageous to the player including the navigation stock and the number of AT games remaining in the advantageous section until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied is initialized to 0, and the end condition The game after the satisfaction of 1 or the end condition 2 is not taken over.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied for the advantageous section based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the end condition 1 or A predetermined period after the end condition 2 is satisfied (in this embodiment, a period over a predetermined number of games (for example, three games), a period until the settlement process is performed, a predetermined time in a state where the bet number is not set ( For example, an advantageous section end condition establishment notification for notifying that an advantageous section end condition has been established over a period until three minutes) elapses, and information regarding the advantageous section because the advantageous section end condition has been established. It is possible to perform the advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that it has been initialized. In the advantageous section end condition establishment notice, the end condition establishment notice 1 for notifying that the end condition 1 is established because the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number The end condition establishment notification 2 that notifies that the end condition 2 is satisfied is included.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the end condition 1 is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit game number based on the command received from the main control unit 41. At the start of the game to be played, that is, when the start switch 7 is operated, the end condition establishment notification 1 is controlled as the advantageous section end condition establishment notification. In the end condition establishment notification 1, a number image indicating the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games in the present embodiment) and a message image indicating that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games ( In this embodiment, by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 the character image “Advantageous section has reached the upper limit (1500 games)”, when the game in which the advantageous section ends is started, the advantageous section is controlled. The fact that the number of played games has reached the specified number of games is notified.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 determines, based on the command received from the main control unit 41, that the end condition 2 is satisfied when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. After the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped and the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop of the game is finished (after the stop switch related to the third stop is released), the game When the payout of medals is completed, the end condition establishment notification 2 is controlled as the advantageous section end condition establishment notification. In the end condition establishment notification 2, a numerical image indicating a prescribed number of net medals in the advantageous zone (2388 in this embodiment) and a message image indicating that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the prescribed number ( For example, by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 “a character image of“ the advantageous section has reached the upper limit (2388) ””, when the game in which the advantageous section ends is completed, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is increased. Notify that the specified number has been exceeded (not shown).

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 makes an advantageous section end notice in an advantageous section end notice image (FIG. 27 (a)) in a game that starts notification of establishment of an advantageous section end condition, that is, a game that ends the advantageous section. In such a game, even if the advantageous section end notice is given, the end condition 1 in the game Alternatively, the fact that the end condition 2 is satisfied is notified.

  It should be noted that the end condition establishment notification 1 and the end condition establishment notification 2 that are performed as the advantageous section end condition establishment notification are displayed in a common display mode (for example, a display mode in which a message image of “the advantageous section has reached the upper limit” is displayed. ). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the end condition (at least one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2) of the advantageous section has been established by the notification of establishment of the advantageous section end condition.

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the advantageous section end notice that has been made before the game in the game that starts the end condition establishment notification when the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. Although it is configured to continue during the game, the advantageous section end notice is given at the start of the game satisfying the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section (when the start switch 7 of the game is operated). It is also possible to perform a control so that the termination condition establishment notification is started at the same time. In such a configuration, in the game in which the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, the end condition establishment notification is performed while the advantageous section end notification is not performed, so the same content is notified in the game. Can be prevented from being performed multiple times.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the sub-control unit 91 performs a game in which the advantageous section ends in a state in which the advantageous section end condition is established, and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate. When the stop game is stopped and the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop of the game is ended (the stop switch related to the third stop is released), the last game of the advantageous section is ended, that is, Control is performed so that advantageous section related information initialization notification is started when data relating to the advantageous section is initialized. In the advantageous section related information initialization notification, a message image (in this embodiment, “navigation information”) indicating that information relating to the advantageous section (in this embodiment, the value of the AT game counter or the value of the navigation stock counter) has been initialized. By displaying on the liquid crystal display 51, the information regarding the advantageous section including the navigation stock regarding the navigation notification has been initialized.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27B, the sub-control unit 91 ends the AT effect (ending) and the advantageous period end notice at the end of the game where the advantageous period is ended, and the game result in the advantageous area. The result notification for notifying is performed. In the result notification, a character image and a number image (for example, an image of “2223”) indicating a net increase in medals in the advantageous section and a number image (for example, an image of “740 game”) indicating the number of games controlled to the AT state ) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the game result in the advantageous section.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the sub-control unit 91 bets to start the next game in a state where the advantageous section end condition establishment notification, the advantageous section related information initialization notification, and the result notification are performed. When the number is set and the start switch 7 is operated, that is, the first game in the normal section is started, the result notification is ended and the normal performance is started. On the other hand, the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are controlled so as to continue until the end condition is satisfied after the lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the advantageous section, and the termination condition is satisfied. Then, control is performed so that these notifications are terminated.

  The sub-control unit 91 ends the advantageous section in a state in which the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are performed as the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification. A game in which the predetermined notification end condition 1 is satisfied when a predetermined number of games (three games in the present embodiment) are performed after the transition to the normal section is satisfied. At the end of, control is performed so as to terminate the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification. In the normal section that is shifted after the advantageous section is ended, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform a normal performance, and after the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are started, The period until the predetermined notification end condition 1 is satisfied includes a game in which the result of the advantageous section is notified and a game in which a normal performance is performed.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 starts the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and is a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section. Also in the game that performs the result notification and the game that performs the normal performance, the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are continued.

  As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the sub-control unit 91 uses the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information as the end conditions of the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification. After the information initialization notification is started, during the period until the above-described predetermined notification end condition 1 is satisfied, the adjustment switch 10 is operated in a state where the game is not being performed, that is, the adjustment is performed on the main control unit 41 side. When the predetermined notification end condition 2 established when the process is performed is satisfied, when the predetermined notification end condition 2 is satisfied, the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are terminated. Control.

  When the adjustment process is performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub control unit 91 adjusts the adjustment suggestion image (in this embodiment, the image of the predetermined character and the message image of “adjustment!” (FIG. 28B). Reference)) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the settlement process is to be performed. Then, after the settlement process is terminated on the main control unit 41 side, the display of the settlement suggestion image is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the process shifts to a normal performance. In addition, after the settlement process is completed on the main control unit 41 side, the display of the settlement suggestion image is terminated by performing a setting operation of the betting number until a predetermined time elapses, and the normal transition is made. To do. Note that when the settlement suggestion image is displayed and the transition is made to the normal performance, the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are not performed (see FIG. 28D).

  As shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (c), the sub-control unit 91 uses the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initial state as the end conditions of the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification. In the period until the above-described predetermined notification end condition 1 or the predetermined notification end condition 2 is satisfied after the start of the notification, the game is not being performed (at least the number of bets for starting the next game is set) When the predetermined notification end condition 3 is satisfied when the predetermined notification end condition 3 is satisfied when the predetermined period (3 minutes in the present embodiment) elapses and the predetermined notification end condition 3 is satisfied. Control is performed to end the end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification. The main control unit 41 continues a state in which no game is being performed (a state in which at least the number of bets for starting the next game is not set) and a predetermined period (3 minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to control to the demonstration state (demonstration state), and the sub-control unit 91 performs a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) when being controlled to the demonstration state on the main control unit 41 side.

  In the demonstration production, as shown in FIG. 28C, for example, the contents of characters and stories appearing in the production of the slot machine 1, videos and images explaining the production to be executed, the composition table of the roles in the slot machine 1, By displaying the payout table, the reel symbol arrangement, the image showing the game flow, and the like on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the slot machine 1 is not in a game. And the sub control part 91 complete | finishes a demonstration production | presentation by performing setting operation of bet | number number during execution of a demonstration production | presentation, and transfers to a normal production | presentation. Note that when the transition to the normal performance is made after the demonstration effect is finished, the advantageous section end condition establishment notification and the advantageous section related information initialization notification are not performed (see FIG. 28D).

[Flow of game control and effect control]
The flow of the control related to the game by the main control unit 41 and the control related to the effect by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming section to the normal section and the advantageous section while controlling the control state related to the AT to the non-AT state, the precursor state, and the AT state. When controlling, an advantageous section transition lottery wins in the internal lottery, and an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. To move to. Then, when controlling to the non-AT state and controlling to the advantageous section, the AT lottery subject wins in the internal lottery to perform AT lottery, and win the AT lottery, Thereafter, control is performed so as to shift to the AT state through the precursor state. Then, until the number of remaining navigation stocks is 0 and the number of remaining AT games is 0, or until the end condition (end condition 1, end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied Control to AT state.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so as to produce an effect in an effect mode according to the control state related to the AT controlled on the main control unit 41 side, and the non-AT state on the main control unit 41 side. When it is controlled, the above-mentioned normal effect is performed, and when it is controlled to the precursor state, a precursor effect (not shown) indicating that it is controlled to the precursor state is performed and controlled to the AT state. In some cases, control is performed to perform the above-described AT effect (normal or ending).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 30, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the main control unit 41 stops the third stop in the game where the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. When the switch operation is completed, that is, at the end of the game, an advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section, and to end the AT state and shift to the non-AT state. Let

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side and controlled to the AT state, the number of advantageous section games is the first at the start of each game. It is determined whether the predetermined value, the third predetermined value, or the upper limit number of games has been reached.

  Then, control is performed so that the AT effect (normal) is performed until the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. When it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value in the state where the AT effect (normal) is being performed, the game that is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value At the start of the game, the ending suggestion is based on the condition that the navigation stock is 1 or more, or that the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (the number of differences between the current advantageous segment number and the first predetermined value). The production starts, and the ending suggestion production is performed while the AT production (normal) is continued. Then, at the end of the game one game before the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect, and the AT effect (ending) is performed. Notify that it has been confirmed.

  Thereafter, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the ending suggestion effect is ended and an ending start image of the AT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Displayed on the display 51, AT effect (ending) is started. Also, at the start of the game when the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the advance advantageous section end notice is started as a prior notice for informing the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance, and the end condition of the advantageous section is established The notification that is close is started.

  Thereafter, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the end of the advantageous section notice (preliminary notification) is ended, and the end condition establishment notification 1 is sent as a post-notification to notify the end of the advantageous section later. The notification to the effect that the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied is started. In addition, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is finished in the game in which the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, that is, at the end of the game, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is started Thus, notification that the information related to the advantageous section, particularly information related to the navigation notification (navigation stock, number of AT games) has been initialized, is started. In addition, at the end of the game when the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, a result notification is given to indicate the game history during AT (the number of AT games, the number of net increase).

  Thereafter, the predetermined notification end condition 1 established by a predetermined number of games (three games in the present embodiment) being performed after the advantageous section is ended, and before the predetermined notification end condition 1 is established, the main control unit The state where no game is played before the predetermined notification end condition 2, the predetermined notification end condition 1, and the predetermined notification end condition 2 established by the settlement process performed on the 41 side is a predetermined period (this implementation) In the example, when one of the predetermined notification end conditions 3 of the predetermined notification end conditions 3 established by continuing for 3 minutes is satisfied, the end condition establishment notification 1 which is a subsequent notification and the advantageous section related information initial stage The conversion notification is terminated.

  The sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform a normal effect from the start of the next game after performing the result notification at the end of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and is an end notification. The condition establishment notification 1 and the advantageous section related information initialization notification may be performed over a game in which a result notification is performed and a game in which a normal performance is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the main control unit 41 increases the medal net increase when the medal net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, that is, when the net increase number in the advantageous section reaches the specified number + 1 or more. In a game in which the number exceeds the specified number, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is ended, that is, at the end of the game, an advantageous interval data initialization process is performed, and the advantageous interval is ended and the normal interval And the AT state is terminated and the non-AT state is entered.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled in the advantageous zone on the main control unit 41 side and controlled to the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone is determined at the start of each game. It is determined whether any of the second predetermined value, the fourth predetermined value, or the specified number of sheets has been exceeded.

  Then, until the start of the next game after the game in which the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, until the start of the next game after the game where the medal net increase has reached the second predetermined value +1, the AT effect (normal) Control to do. When it is specified that the medal net increase exceeds the fourth predetermined value in the state where the AT effect (normal) is being performed, that is, when it is specified that the medal net increase has reached the fourth predetermined value +1, At the end of the game specified that the net increase in medals exceeds the fourth predetermined value, the navigation stock is 1 or more, or the number of remaining AT games is the predetermined number of games (the number of current advantageous section games and the upper limit number of games). The ending suggestion effect is started on the condition that the difference game count) or more, and the AT effect (normal) is continuously performed.

  Then, at the end of the game in which the net medal increase number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the game in which the medal net increase number reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect. Informing that the AT effect (ending) is confirmed to be performed.

  Thereafter, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the next game after the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, after the game where the medal net increased number reaches the second predetermined value + 1. At the start of the game, the ending suggestion effect is ended, and an ending start image of the AT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to start the AT effect (ending). In addition, at the start of the game next to the game where the net number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value, the advance advantageous section end notice is started as a prior notice for informing the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance, and the advantageous section ends. The notification that the conditions are almost satisfied is started.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is finished in the game where the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, and the payout of medals is completed, that is, the game in which the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. At the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end notice (preliminary notice) is terminated, the end condition establishment notice 2 is started as a post-notification to inform the end of the advantageous section later, and the advantageous section end condition 2 is established. Start notification. Also, at the end of the game when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is started as a post-notification, and information regarding the advantageous section, particularly information regarding the navigation notification (navigation stock, number of AT games) ) Is started to notify that it has been initialized. In addition, at the end of the game where the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, a result notification is given to indicate the game history during AT (the number of AT games, the net increase).

  After that, after the advantageous section is ended, a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment) are established, the predetermined notification end condition 1 is established, and before the predetermined notification end condition 1 is established, the main control unit The state where no game is played before the predetermined notification end condition 2, the predetermined notification end condition 1, and the predetermined notification end condition 2 established by the settlement process performed on the 41 side is a predetermined period (this implementation) In the example, when the predetermined notification end condition 3 of the predetermined notification end conditions 3 established by continuing for 3 minutes) is satisfied, the end condition establishment notification 2 that is a subsequent notification and the advantageous section related information initial The conversion notification is terminated.

  The sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform a normal performance from the start of the next game after notifying the result at the end of the game when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. The end condition establishment notification 2 and the advantageous section related information initialization notification may be performed over a game in which a result notification is performed and a game in which a normal performance is performed.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs from the start of the game when the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value to the start of the game after which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. From the end of the game when the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, from the end of the game where the net increase in medal reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the net increase in medals reaches the specified number. It is possible to give an advance notice of an advantageous section over the period until the end of the game that exceeds, that is, until the end of the game when the net increase in medals reaches the specified number + 1. Before reaching the advantageous section ending condition 1 or before the advantageous section ending condition 2 is satisfied when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number End establishment of the condition 1 or termination condition 2 is that it is possible to notify that close, it is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous interval is terminated by termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is satisfied.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 establishes a predetermined notification termination condition from a game in which the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit game number or the medal net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. It is possible to perform an end condition establishment notification (end condition establishment notification 1 or end condition establishment notification 2) and advantageous section related information initialization notification as a post-event notification over a predetermined period until the end condition 1 or end of the advantageous section After the condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to notify that the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied and that the information related to the advantageous section is initialized along with the end of the advantageous section. By performing advantageous section related information initialization notification as a post-event notification, even if the advantageous section ends and the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the player may be dissatisfied or confused. Can be prevented. Further, by performing the post-notification for a predetermined period, even when the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it can be surely recognized that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

[Operation effect 1]
Some conventional slot machines are controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and are configured to include an advantageous state lamp that is turned on over the period controlled to the advantageous state. In the slot machine having such a configuration, no consideration is given to the timing when the advantageous state lamp is turned on or turned off.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous zone shift lottery target and shifts to the advantageous zone in the advantageous zone shift lottery. In this case, it is possible to shift the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section advantageous to the player, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) that notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. 8th segment), and after the transition to the advantageous section, the navigation notification is first performed, and at the start of the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on. It is possible to notify that it has shifted to the section, and before the first navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts to be turned on. It is. In such a configuration, by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the navigation notification on the game assistance indicator 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The display of the navigation notification on the device 12 may be started simultaneously. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can end the advantageous section when the advantageous section ending condition is satisfied when the advantageous section is controlled. Is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the game has ended, and when it is an advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific result (small role), the main control unit 41 can stop different symbol combinations on the reel according to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended differs depending on the stopped symbol combination. It can be focused on the notification by the interval notifying LED 12a.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses different symbol combinations depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result (re-playing combination). In this case, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is shared by the stopped symbol combination. Can prevent the player from being confused.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can adjust the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is performed. When the advantageous section ends, the main control unit 41 notifies the advantageous section that the advantageous section has ended by the advantageous section notification LED 12a in a period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes valid after being stopped by the reel. Since it is a structure, after recognizing that the advantageous area was complete | finished, a player can complete | finish a game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, when a small role wins and ends the advantageous section, the advantageous section at a timing after the display of the number of paid-out medals by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. Since the notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that the medal has been paid out.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the re-gamer wins and ends the advantageous section, it is advantageous at the timing after the notification that the re-game is given is completed by starting the lighting of the LED 20 during replay. Since the section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to suggest that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that the replay has been granted.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the advantageous section ends, after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped and the lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started, the medal insertion Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies the end of the advantageous section at a timing before the fact that the advantageous section has been notified, the player starts the next game without knowing that the advantageous section has ended. It is possible to prevent a medal from being inserted in order to make it happen.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment displays a navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R which is advantageous to the player, and a medal payout number to be paid to the player with the winning of the small role. It is possible to control the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in a lighting state during the period in which the game auxiliary display 12 is provided and controlled in the advantageous section. It is a configuration capable of notifying that it has shifted to the section, and is configured to notify that it has shifted to the advantageous section and that the advantageous section has ended by using a part of the game auxiliary indicator 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Therefore, as a display means for notifying that it has shifted to the advantageous section, a display means that is separate from the game auxiliary indicator 12 that displays the navigation notification and the medal payout number is displayed. There is no need to provide the control unit 41.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to use a part of the game assistance indicator 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended. The display means provided separately from the display 12 may be used as an advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the transition to the advantageous section has been made. For example, the game auxiliary display 12 and the game auxiliary display 12 A configuration may be adopted in which display means such as separate LEDs and lamps are arranged and the display means is used to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended. According to this configuration, the display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended is provided separately from the game auxiliary indicator 12, so that a display for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted is displayed. It can be clearly distinguished from other displays, and even in this case, it is provided in the vicinity of the display means, so that oversight by the player can be prevented.

  It should be noted that display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended are, for example, various indicators such as the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the insertion request LED 17 provided in the game display unit 13. By disposing on the substrate on which the display device and the like are disposed, the display means can be provided in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display device 12, and an oversight by the player can be prevented. Further, display means for notifying that the vehicle has shifted to the advantageous section is arranged around the switches that are operated at the start or end of the game, such as the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10, for example. , Can prevent oversight by the player.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 shifts the game section to the advantageous section, and then establishes the advantageous section notification start condition, so that the advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. A configuration in which the lighting of the LED 12a is started to notify that it has shifted to the advantageous section, while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is ended to notify that the advantageous section has ended. However, the main control unit 41 lights the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the end of the game to be shifted to the advantageous section, notifies that it has shifted to the advantageous section, and at the end of the game at which the advantageous section is ended, A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section is ended.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment includes an advantageous section notification LED 12a (eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) that notifies that the advantageous section has been shifted and the advantageous section has ended. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be turned off, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended, and in the main process, the state control data (turned off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Before performing the setting process, the AT state management process initializes a predetermined area in which data related to the advantageous section is stored in the RAM 41c to initialize the data related to the advantageous section. Although the section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off and the fact that the advantageous section has ended is reported, That data can be prevented from remaining in a predetermined area of RAM 41c.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the data related to the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c before performing the process of setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. By performing the processing, the data related to the advantageous section is initialized before the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. It may be configured to initialize the data regarding. For example, the processing for setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the processing for initializing the data related to the advantageous section are performed in the timer interrupt process performed at the same timing. The control for turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process of initializing the data relating to the advantageous section can be performed at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to initialize the data related to the advantageous section before controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state. The section notification LED 12a may be controlled to be turned off. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data relating to the advantageous section from being initialized during the period in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  In the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores the data related to the advantageous section in the AT state management process before performing the process of setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The initialization process for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the initialization process does not include the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Since the data relating to the advantageous section initialized by the above-mentioned configuration does not include the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is used for state control. Before performing the process of setting data (lights off), the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a Since the set state control data (lighting) is not initialized by the initialization process in the AT state management process, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is surely controlled to be lit until the advantageous section ends. Can do.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs a net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone (from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone to the total number of medals used for setting the bet number in the advantageous zone. It is possible to update the net increase counter for counting the number of sheets obtained by subtracting the number of sheets, and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the value of the net increase counter is a predetermined rule. Number of sheets (in this embodiment, a value (2388) obtained by subtracting the maximum number (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 from 2400 and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the number of bets) If the specified number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number + 1, the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous zone. The main control unit 41 adds the value for the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter when the net increase number counter is updated, and updates the net increase number counter. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal minute value used for setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, and when the calculated value is 0 or more, By controlling to update the value of the net increase number counter so that the calculated value becomes the value of the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals is calculated starting from when the net increase in medals has decreased most since the start of the advantageous period. Based on the value of the net increase counter, the advantageous interval is terminated and the normal interval is shifted to the normal interval when the net increase in medals exceeds a specified number.

  According to this configuration, after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase in the number of medals up to the present when the net increase in gaming value has decreased most, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section Even if the net increase in medals starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the prescribed number, it is advantageous if the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number after the medal starts to increase. Since the section ends, not only the net increase in medals in the advantageous section but also the net increase in medals after the start of the advantageous section can be limited to a range based on the prescribed number.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 specifies the payout number value of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game during the advantageous period. Based on the net increase value obtained by adding the payout number to the net increase value specified based on the net increase counter and subtracting the number of medals used for the bet from the net increase value after the addition The configuration for counting the net increase counter to be updated, that is, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section counted by the net increase counter is configured based on the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section. The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section must be set by the player as the bet number based on at least the number of medals awarded to the player. It is sufficient if the medal used in the game is subtracted, and when the player is allowed to win a predetermined small role with an actual medal grant in the internal lottery, and the player generates a prize for the small role. In the case where it is not possible to win a prize in spite of the situation that can be awarded, the medal that is given as if the winning of the small role has occurred is regarded as the medal given to the player. The structure which counts may be sufficient.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 reads the net increase number value specified based on the net increase number counter into a predetermined register, and then performs the game. Specify the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag, add the number of medals to the net increase value in the predetermined register, and subtract the number of medals used to set the bet number from the net increase value after the addition The main controller 41 updates the net increase number counter based on the net increase number value obtained in this way. However, when the net increase number counter is updated, the main control unit 41 uses the payout number value of medals to be paid out in the game. By adding the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of medals used to set the number of bets in the game to the net increase counter, the net increase Counter may be updated to configure.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines the net increase number specified based on the net increase number counter when determining whether or not the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number in the AT state management process. After the numerical value is read into a predetermined register, the payout number value of medals to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag of the game, the payout number is added to the net increase value in the predetermined register, and the bet is calculated from the net increase value after the addition. A configuration in which a net increase number value in the game is calculated in a predetermined register by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the number, and it is determined whether or not the net increase value value in the predetermined register exceeds a prescribed number However, the main control unit 41 calculates the net increase number of the game based on the medal payout number value and the number of medals used for setting the bet number in the game. After adding the calculated net increase number to the net increase number counter and updating the net increase number counter, whether or not the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number is determined based on the value of the net increase number counter. A configuration for determining may be used.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal value used for setting is less than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0. In the net increase counter, the increase / decrease number of medals is When the value is below 0, the numerical value below 0 is not counted, and only the numerical value above 0 is counted, but the main control unit 41 is configured to count the numerical value below 0, that is, for a minus range game A configuration that counts the net increase in value may also be used. For example, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 at the start of the advantageous section, and then when the medal is paid out in the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 sets the value corresponding to the number of paid out medals to the net increase number counter. When a medal is used to set the bet number, the process of subtracting the value for the number of medals from the net increase counter is repeated, so that the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted. Counting is possible both when the number of medals increases and decreases below 0 and when the number of medals increases and decreases above 0.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals starting from the time when the net increase in medals has decreased most, based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section. However, the main control unit 41, as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the normal section to the advantageous section exceeds the specified number In this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set. Since there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from the time other than when the transition to the advantageous section, the end condition of the advantageous section is determined based on the value of the net increase counter. It is possible to simplify the control determines the.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals starting from the time when the net increase in medals has decreased most, based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section. However, the main control unit 41, as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, suggests that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the AT state after the transition to the advantageous section and the navigation notification When the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the above, the configuration may be such that when the net increase in medals up to the present exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to. According to this, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is notified. It is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from the point other than when the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by the navigation notification, which indicates that the ED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals starting from the time when the net increase in medals has decreased most, based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section. However, the main control unit 41, regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by navigation notification after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section. In addition, when it is suggested by the advantageous section notification LED 12a that the state has shifted to the AT state, when the net increase in medals up to now exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted to. Well, according to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section Regardless of whether or not an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification, the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section is based on the net increase of medals starting from a point other than when the transition to the advantageous section is suggested. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the advantageous section, the AT state in which the navigation notification that informs the player of the operation mode advantageous for the player when the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery is performed, Even if the winning role is selected in the lottery, it is possible to control the control state related to the AT including the warning state in which the navigation notification is not performed, and when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, Regardless of whether the control state related to the AT is the AT state or not, a winning with a payout of medals occurs, so that the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase counter, and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section However, when updating the net increment counter, the main control unit 41 is in a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous period. In this case, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player and the medal is increased, the increment is added to the net increase counter, and the internal lottery When the navigation target combination is won and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated and the medals do not increase in an operation mode advantageous to the player, the net increase counter is not added, and the AT control is performed in the advantageous section. When the state is the AT state and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the medals are increased in an operation mode advantageous to the player. , The increment of medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an advantageous manner for the player is added to the net increase counter. Thus, the configuration may be such that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. According to this configuration, in the sign state in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified in the advantageous section, the navigation target role is determined by internal lottery. If the number of medals actually increases even if is won, it is added to the net increase counter, and if the medal cannot be increased, it is not added to the net increase counter. In the AT state in which the mode is notified, the net increase counter is added regardless of whether or not the medal has actually increased when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. If it is possible to increase the number of medals, regardless of whether the number of medals has actually increased or not, it is possible to intentionally extend the advantageous section by adding the net increase counter. If the situation is such that the player cannot reliably increase medals, adding the net increase counter only when the medals actually increase may be disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when updating the net increase counter, if the control state related to AT is in a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section, increase when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery and medals increase. When the number of minutes to be added is added to the net increase counter and the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, but when the medal does not increase, the net increase counter is not added and the AT control state is in the AT state in the advantageous section In addition, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the increase in medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not medals have increased. Is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in medals in the advantageous zone. Regardless of which control state the control state is related to, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined small role in which the predetermined operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals does not change, Regardless of whether or not the number of medals operated in a predetermined operation mode is increased, the increment of medals when operated in the predetermined operation mode is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in medals in the advantageous section However, according to this configuration, if the player can increase the medals in the advantageous section, the net increase counter can be added regardless of whether or not the medals have actually increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being intentionally extended.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and that the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed without determining whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, Since it is configured to end, when it is established that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games as the end condition of the advantageous section, Since it is not necessary to perform the determination of whether a net increase number exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to simplify the control according to the determination of whether a net increase number exceeds a predetermined number in the preferred interval.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and that the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. In the AT state management process, it is first determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. In the AT state management process, first, in the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. Therefore, when the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit game number and the advantageous section is ended, the determination is made whether or not the advantageous section game number has reached the upper limit game number. Than the control can be omitted control according to the determination whether the net increase number exceeds a specified number of complicated advantageous period.

  In the present embodiment, in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 first determines whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined number. If the net increase in the section does not exceed the prescribed number, it may be configured to determine whether the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. According to this configuration, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. Since the frequency at which the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number can be higher than the frequency at which the control is performed, the control related to the determination of the low frequency event can be omitted.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and that the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. The advantageous section is terminated when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. If the number reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the common data (data regarding the advantageous section) is obtained. Since it is a configuration to be initialized, the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase in the advantageous section This is common when either the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number is established. Since the data is initialized, it is possible to prevent a difference in advantage between when both of these conditions are satisfied and when only one of the conditions is satisfied.

  For example, as the first condition, when the advantageous section ends only when the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit game number in the advantageous section, the data corresponding to the first condition is initialized, and the second condition is In the configuration in which the data corresponding to the second condition is initialized when only the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of sheets and the advantageous section ends, both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. When the advantageous section ends, if the data corresponding to the first condition and the data corresponding to the second condition are initialized, the game is more than when one of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Although it may be disadvantageous for the user, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, it is common to the case where one of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section By adopting a configuration for initializing data, there is a difference in the advantage between when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Can be prevented.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the AT state management process, and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. Since the advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section continues for a long period of time. Even if the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time, if the medal increases rapidly in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, It is possible to prevent the advantage in the advantageous section from increasing excessively.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment sets the control state data (lighted) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, and waits for one interrupt. After performing the above, by controlling the display of the navigation notification to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the instruction setting process, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, and then the game auxiliary display 12 In a configuration in which navigation notification is started and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification in a game in which it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section. The timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by navigation notification is notified. Since it is the structure which suggests that it shifted to the advantageous section by the section notification LED 12a, in the game where it is suggested that the transition to the advantageous section is suggested by the advantageous section notification LED 12a, stop switches 8L, 8C, When the operation mode of 8R is notified, it is suggested that the advantageous zone notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous zone before the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by the navigation notification is notified. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals in the game after recognizing that the period has shifted to the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 indicates that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals by navigation notification is notified. Although it is a suggested structure, in the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by navigation notification. It may be a configuration in which it is suggested that the lighting has started and the shift to the advantageous section is suggested. According to this configuration, in the game in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the shift to the advantageous section is suggested, the medal is increased by the navigation notification. When the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to be notified is notified, Since it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at the same timing as the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medal by the notification is notified, the fact that it has shifted to the advantageous section The operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals can be recognized simultaneously.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 indicates that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals by navigation notification is notified. In the game where the advantageous section notification LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section is suggested, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals is notified by the navigation notification, After the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation, it may be configured to start the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and to indicate that it has shifted to the advantageous section. In a game in which it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section. When the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the medal is notified by the navigation notification, the advantageous section after the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the medal is notified by the navigation notification Since the notification LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section has been made, it is suggested at what timing the transition to the advantageous section is suggested after the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified. It can be noted.

[Operation effect 2]
As a conventional slot machine, it is designed to control the advantageous section that can inform the player about the advantageous operation mode, and the medal payout rate is appropriate when the special winning prize is carried over There is a thing of the structure.

  In a configuration where the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the situation where the winning of special prizes is carried over like the latter slot machine, the case where the slot machine is first installed in the amusement store or data When the game is initialized, it is necessary to play a game at the game store side until a special prize is won so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. On the other hand, in the case of controlling the advantageous section like the former slot machine, if it is configured so that it can be controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store side plays until the special prize is won, before the player plays the game Since there is a possibility of being controlled to an advantageous section, there is a possibility that fairness may be lost when a player plays a game.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the special combination (BB) It is possible to carry over the winning game after the next game, and the operation mode (the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous to the player when the push order small role is won in the internal lottery It is possible to perform navigation notification to notify, and it is possible to control to an advantageous section that can notify the correct push order by navigation notification, and the special role (BB) winning is carried over It is possible to notify the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the navigation notification in the inside, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside. It is possible to control to an advantageous section in both non-internal and internal areas where the winning of special role (BB) is not carried over, and the end condition of the advantageous section in the interior is at least the end condition 1, One of the end conditions 2 is satisfied, while the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside is that the end condition 3 is satisfied. The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the advantage in the non-inside The section end conditions are different from each other.

  According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, the end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the non-inside inside Since the end condition of the advantageous section is different, suitable control can be performed depending on whether it is inside or not inside.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct pressing order can be notified by navigation notification, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the interior, The medal payout rate is inadequate and can be controlled to an advantageous section both inside and inside, and whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section If it is determined that it is in the non-inside, the advantageous section is started by controlling the advantageous section to end at the end of the game. In this game, the advantageous section is ended.

  According to this configuration, when the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and the medal payout rate is Since the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, the player can play a game even if the game is controlled in the advantageous section in a situation where the game shop side plays until the inside of the inside where the payout rate of the medal becomes appropriate. The advantageous section ends before the game is performed, and it is possible to prevent the fairness from being lost when the player plays the game.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the game. By controlling so that the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, but the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started. For example, only in the first game in the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal, and if it is determined that it is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. A configuration for controlling the section to end may also be used.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is controlled in the game in the advantageous section by applying that the gaming state is non-internal as an arbitrary condition (end condition 3) of the ending conditions of the advantageous section. When it is established that the gaming state being non-internal is established, the advantageous section is controlled so that the advantageous section is terminated. Although it is a configuration for ending the advantageous section, as an optional condition, it may be applied that the controlled gaming state becomes inside, and when it is inside the case when controlling to the advantageous section in non-inside, it becomes inside The configuration may be such that the advantageous section is terminated if an arbitrary condition is satisfied. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game (non-inside and inside) in which the gaming state is changed from non-inside to inside by referring to the game state of the game and the winning status of special roles. In the game in which the winning of the special role is specified), the control is made so as to end the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, an arbitrary condition is established when the inside becomes the inside The advantageous section can be terminated as follows. Moreover, the structure which terminates the said advantageous area may be sufficient as arbitrary conditions are materialized when it becomes inside. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game in which the game state is changed from non-internal to internal is determined by referring to the game state of the game and the game state of the previous game (the previous game is not In the game where the current game is inside, the control is made so that the advantageous section is terminated. It can be set as the structure which terminates the said advantageous area as said having been established.

  According to this configuration, when the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and when the medal payout rate is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-inside, Since the advantageous section is ended by being in the middle, even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in a situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the inside where the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate, even before the player plays a game Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fairness from being lost when the player plays a game.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled as non-internal, internal, or special state as a gaming state. The special state is a combination of BB general and a special combination (RB) in the BB general. In general, the probability that a special combination (RB) allowed to derive a special combination (RB) will be won in the internal lottery is normal (non- RB has a higher probability of winning a winning combination in the internal lottery than the non-inner and the inside. The BB is generally not controlled in the advantageous section.

  According to this configuration, in the BB general where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, it is not controlled to the advantageous section, so unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the BB general is not required.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled as non-internal, internal, or special state as a gaming state. The special state is a combination of BB general and a special combination (RB) in the BB general. In general, the probability that a special combination (RB) allowed to derive a special combination (RB) will be won in the internal lottery is normal (non- RB has a higher probability of winning a winning combination in the internal lottery than the non-inner and the inside. In the RB, the control is not performed in the advantageous section.

  According to this configuration, in the RB where the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the control is not performed in the advantageous section. Therefore, unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB is not required.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to a state other than the general BB (non-inside, inside inside, RB), the special role (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery while the gaming state is BB. When it is general, by being subject to internal lottery, the general probability of BB general is that the special combination (RB) allowed to derive the special combination (RB) symbol combination is won in the internal lottery (non- In the configuration in which the special role (RB) is subject to the lottery of the internal lottery even when the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal or internal state The probability that the special role (RB) wins in the internal lottery in the general BB is compared with the probability that the special role (RB) wins in the internal lottery in at least one of the non-internal or internal states. A high configuration may be used.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a sub-control unit 91 that can execute an internal medium suggestion that indicates that it is inside, and a main that can execute an advantageous section notification that indicates that it is controlled in an advantageous section. The control unit 41, and the sub-control unit 91 suggests that the game state has been shifted to the inside by ending the preparation effect at the end of the game when the game state has been shifted from the non-inside to the inside. While the internal suggestion can be executed using the liquid crystal display 51, the main control unit 41 uses the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the next game after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. Advantageous position notification is possible, the position where the internal medium suggestion is executed is different from the position where the advantageous section notification is executed, the timing when the internal medium suggestion is executed, and the advantageous section notification is executed To be And the timing, it is a different configuration.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding of the suggestion that the inside has become inside due to the inside suggestion and the suggestion that the shift to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification has occurred.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct push order can be notified by navigation notification, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the interior, Is provided with a main control unit 41 capable of executing an advantageous zone notification that suggests that the medal payout rate is inappropriate and is controlled to be in an advantageous zone, both inside and outside. The main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) for performing the navigation notification when the inside is controlled to the advantageous zone. After the transition to the section, it is possible to execute the advantageous section notification when the inside is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling to perform the advantageous section notification in the game that performs the navigation notification first. It is configured to not perform favorable interval notification if it is controlled advantageously interval in the non-internally in.

  According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate. If controlled, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the advantageous section notification is not executed when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, so the medal payout rate In the situation where a game shop plays a game until the inside becomes appropriate, unnecessary advantageous section notification is not executed.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct pressing order can be notified by navigation notification, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the interior, Is a configuration in which the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and a main control unit 41 capable of executing an advantageous zone notification that suggests that the medal is being controlled in an advantageous zone, and an internal Provided with a sub-control unit 91 capable of executing suggestions, and can be controlled to an advantageous section in both non-inside and inside, and when the main control unit 41 is controlling in the inside and the advantageous section In addition, it is possible to shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) in which the navigation notification is performed, and after the transition to the advantageous section, control is performed so that the advantageous section notification is performed in the game in which the navigation notification is performed first. so When it is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-inside, the advantageous section notification is not executed, but the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparation effect during the non-internal control from the non-inside to the inside. When the transition is made, the transition is made from the non-inside to the inside by performing the control so that the normal stage effect is performed in the inside without performing the preparation in preparation when the inside is controlled. In this case, the internal suggestion is executed.

  According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate. If controlled, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the main control unit 41 does not execute the advantageous section notification when the advantageous section is controlled. In the situation where the game store side plays the game until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, unnecessary suggestion is not executed, but in the case of transition from non-inside to inside, the sub-control unit Since the inside suggestion by 91 is executed, it is possible to specify that the medal payout rate has become an appropriate inside in a situation where a game is played at the game store side.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 causes the main control unit 41 to display a non-internal gaming state by causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display a preparation-in-progress screen and a non-internal-indication screen during a preparation effect. It is controlled to be in the middle or special state and suggests that the medal payout rate has not been transferred to the inside where the payout rate is appropriate. The sub control unit 91 may be configured to display only the screen being prepared on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparation effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparation effect when the gaming state is controlled to the non-inside, while the preparation state effect is performed when the gaming state is controlled to the inside. In this configuration, the internal state suggests that the gaming state has shifted from the non-internal state to the internal state, but the internal state suggestion is at least an internal state where the payout rate of medals is appropriate. As long as it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-inside to the inside in the situation where the game store side plays the game, the period during which the main control unit 41 controls the inside While performing a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51, an effect of controlling a specific LED to be lit, an effect of outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53, 54, etc.) Controlled inside The specific effect may not be performed in a period during which the specific effect is performed, or the specific effect may be performed over a period that is controlled in the inside, while the specific effect may not be performed in the period that is controlled in the interior. . In these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-internal to the internal in the situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. is there.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs a non-internal display effect that is not performed when the gaming state is controlled inside, every time the gaming state is controlled inside non-inside, Each time the gaming state changes from non-internal to internal, the internal medium suggests that it has shifted from non-internal to internal, but the internal medium suggests that at least the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where the game store side plays the game until it becomes the inside, it is sufficient that it can indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-inside to the inside, and the main control unit 41 side performs the RAM clear. After it is determined that the gaming state has not yet been transferred to the inside, the storage means (for example, the non-internal state being controlled, the slot machine 1 at the time of factory shipment, etc. (for example, (E.g. RAM) is initialized After being played, the game state is not yet controlled to the inside on the main control unit 41 side, and the non-inside display effect is performed in the controlled non-inside, and the non-inside inside transitions to the inside. After being done, it may be configured such that the non-internal display effect is not performed even if the non-internal display effect is made. In such a configuration, after the situation where the game shop side plays a game until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, unnecessary internal suggestion is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the internal medium suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub control unit 91, but the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform the internal medium suggestion. For example, when the main control unit 41 includes an LED indicator that suggests that the main control unit 41 is not inside or inside, and the LED display is not inside. It is possible to adopt a configuration that suggests that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling the light to be turned off when the inside is inside, or the lighting state when the LED indicator is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling to be turned off when it is not inside. Moreover, in the structure provided with the LED display which suggests that the main control part 41 is not inside or inside, the indicator (for example, game assistance) which performs the said LED display other than an inside suggestion etc. It may be configured to be shared with the display unit 12 or the like, or may be configured as a dedicated display unit that performs only internal suggestion.

[Operation effect 3]
As a conventional slot machine, the advantageous state is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit of 1500 games, the advantageous state is terminated and the advantageous state There is a configuration in which information related to control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining games is also initialized.

  In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is terminated, and information related to the control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining advantageous games is also provided. It will be initialized, but information related to the control of the advantageous state is initialized, and there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied with the player who does not know that the information is not carried over to the subsequent game There is a risk of confusion.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. When either one is established, it is possible to end the advantageous section, and it is possible to execute an advantageous section data initialization process for initializing information relating to the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. Further, the slot machine 1 includes a sub-control unit 91 capable of performing advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information relating to the advantageous section has been initialized, and the sub-control unit 91 ends the advantageous section. The advantageous section related information initialization notification is started in the game to be performed, and the advantageous section related information initialization notification is continued in the game after the game in which the advantageous section ends.

  According to this configuration, when one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends, and the information about the advantageous section is initialized. Since the advantageous section related information initialization notification that informs the effect is performed, even if the advantageous section ends and information on the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the player may be dissatisfied or confused Can be prevented. Further, the advantageous section related information initialization notification starts in the game where the advantageous section ends, and is continuously performed in the game after the game where the advantageous section ends. Even when the initialization notification is missed, it can be surely recognized that the information related to the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

  The sub-control unit 91 can perform advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information related to the advantageous section has been initialized, and a game result in the advantageous section in a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends. In the game in which the effect presentation is executed and the normal effect is executed after the result notification is executed, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is started in the game in which the advantageous section ends. This is a configuration in which the advantageous section related information initialization notification is continued even in a game after a game in which a section ends and a game in which a result notification is executed and a game in which a normal effect is executed.

  According to this configuration, the advantageous section related information initialization notification starts in a game in which the advantageous section ends, is a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, and a game in which the result notification in the advantageous section is executed and Since it is continuously performed in the game in which the subsequent normal performance is executed, even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game where the advantageous section ends, it is ensured that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over. Can be recognized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to advantageous sections can be executed. Advantageous section end condition 1 is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous sections (the number of advantageous section games) is the specified number of games In the embodiment, it is to reach 1500 games), and the end condition 2 is that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment).

  According to this configuration, the advantageous section is ended when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the prescribed number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. Since it is initialized, it can suppress that gambling nature increases more than being controlled by an advantageous area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization process for initializing information related to advantageous sections can be executed, and navigation stock that is the right to be controlled by the AT in the advantageous sections is consumed, and the control state related to AT is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control to the AT state which is an advantageous state, and the information regarding the advantageous section includes the navigation stock, and the main control unit 41 is in the case where either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section In addition, even when one or more navigation stocks remain, the advantageous section is terminated.

  According to this configuration, even when one or more navigation stocks remain, the advantageous section ends, and even when the navigation stock is not subsequently taken over as information relating to the advantageous section, the player can be aware of that. It is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment consumes navigation stock that is the right to be controlled by the AT in the advantageous section, and can control the control state related to the AT to the AT state that is advantageous for the player. The sub-control unit 91 is capable of performing advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that the information regarding the advantageous section including the navigation stock has been initialized, and is provided on the main control section 41 side. The AT effect (usually) that suggests the remaining number of navigation stock that is given and not consumed is possible.

  According to this configuration, until the information about the advantageous section is initialized, that is, until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, the AT that is given and remains without being consumed on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to suggest the remaining number of navigation stocks, which is the right to be controlled by the AT effect (usually). In addition, despite the fact that it is suggested that the navigation stock that is the right to be controlled by the AT remains, the advantageous section ends, and the right to control to the advantageous state as information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over However, the advantage section related information initialization notification allows the player to recognize it, and thus prevents the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section can be executed, and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) is the specified number of games (this embodiment) In this case, the sub-control unit 91 starts a game in which the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous section ends. In other words, when the start switch 7 of the game is operated, an end condition establishment notification 1 for notifying that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached the specified number of games can be executed. A Do configuration.

  According to this configuration, when the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, that is, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), the game It is possible to recognize that the advantageous section is over.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section can be executed, and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). When the advantageous section ending condition 2 is satisfied and the advantageous section is ended, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to end all the games in the game. When the reel is stopped and the stop switch operation for the third stop of the game is finished, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number A configuration capable of executing a termination condition is satisfied notification 2 for informing fact.

  According to this configuration, when the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (2388 in this embodiment), the advantageous section ends in the game. Can be recognized.

  In this embodiment, the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is a configuration that is established when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The configuration may be established when the number of controlled games exceeds the number of games (for example, 1499 games) immediately before reaching the specified number of games. Similarly, the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is configured so that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (2388 in this embodiment), but the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is It may be a specified value (for example, 2389 sheets) or more.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section can be executed, and the game value owned by the player can be stored as a credit in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the game is not being played. When the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10, the settlement control is performed to settle the medals stored in the credits and return them to the player. Further, the sub-control unit 91 can perform advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information regarding the advantageous section has been initialized, and in the game where the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is performed. Is started, and the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when the settlement control is performed.

  According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when the settlement control is performed. It is possible to prevent the information initialization notification from continuing.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information on advantageous sections can be executed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information on advantageous sections has been initialized. It is possible to start the advantageous section related information initialization notification in the game where the advantageous section ends, and after the game, the number of bets for starting the next game is not set, and a predetermined period (in this embodiment, This is a configuration in which the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when three minutes) have elapsed.

  According to this configuration, after the game is over, the betting number for starting the next game is not set, and the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when a predetermined period has elapsed, so the player has changed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section related information initialization notification from continuing.

[Operation effect 4]
As a conventional slot machine, there is a configuration that controls an advantageous state advantageous to the player and terminates the advantageous state when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches 1500 games which is a limit value.

  In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state ends, but even in a situation where the number of games controlled to the advantageous state does not reach the limit value, There is a possibility that an advantageous situation may occur in the meantime, and it is not possible to sufficiently prevent an excessive advantage.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The main control unit 41 includes the number of advantageous section games and medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The net increase number can be counted and updated, and the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section Can be terminated when either one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding the prescribed number (2388 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. In addition, when the slot machine 1 reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number. A sub-control unit capable of executing a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established regardless of when the previous second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached. 91, the sub-control unit 91 includes the remaining number of games up to the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games as information related to the end condition 1 and information on the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section as information regarding the end condition 2 In this configuration, both the remaining number of sheets up to the upper limit number are notified.

  According to this configuration, the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase in number of medals updated in the advantageous section is established when the number exceeds the specified number. Even when one of the end conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section is ended when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively advantageous by being controlled to the advantageous section. Moreover, it is advantageous in any case when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in number of medals reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the prescribed number. Since the common advantageous section end notice is executed to notify that the end condition of the section is almost established, it is possible to notify in advance that the advantageous section will be ended. Is established and the advantageous section can be prevented from suddenly ending. At this time, since the common advantageous section end notice includes both information related to the end condition 1 and information related to the end condition 2, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is used even if the common advantageous section end notice is included. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end by

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 establishes the advantageous section end condition 1 when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value). It is determined that the advantageous section is ended, and it is determined that the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value). The advantageous section may be configured to end, or the advantageous section end condition 1 is reached when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (first prescribed value −1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first prescribed value). It may be determined that is established and the advantageous section is terminated. In addition, the main control unit 41 determines that the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (second prescribed value), and terminates the advantageous section. However, if the net increase in the advantageous zone reaches the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1) or more than the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number, the favorable condition end condition 2 is satisfied. It may be determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the advantageous section may be terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the advantageous section end notice when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment). The advantage section end notice is executed when the number of games exceeds the first predetermined value, but it is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value immediately before reaching the first predetermined value (1399 games). It may be configured to execute a section end notice. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute the advance notice of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that an advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of sheets reaches a second predetermined value or more, or an advantageous section end notice is executed when the net increase in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value + 1. .

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The main control unit 41 counts the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The end condition 1 established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the prescribed number In the embodiment, when any one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding 2388) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.

  According to this configuration, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase in the number of medals increased during the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number and reaches the prescribed number + 1 or more. Since the section ends, it can be suppressed that the section becomes advantageous more than being controlled to the advantageous section.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached before reaching the value, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established The advantageous section end notice includes the difference in the number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the remaining number of games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games, and the net increase in medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied. Difference, that is, in a manner in which the remaining number up to the prescribed number of medals is increased, and the end condition 1 is satisfied each time the advantageous section game number and the medals net increase number are updated. A configuration in which the difference of medals net increase number of preferably up period number of games of the difference and the termination condition 2 is satisfied is updated.

  According to this configuration, the remaining number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the remaining net increase in medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied are recognized in real time every time the remaining value changes. Can do.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached before reaching the value, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established The advantageous section end notice is the case where the upper limit number of advantageous section games (1500 games in this embodiment) when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. The specified number of medals with net increase is notified in a identifiable manner, and is started when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, or when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value. ,advantageous Termination condition is satisfied is near or that establishment of termination condition 2 1 between is configured to notify that close.

  According to this configuration, the player is made to recognize the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games related to the advantageous section end condition 1 and the prescribed number of medals net increase in the advantageous section related to the advantageous section end condition 2. And the player can be made aware that the end condition 1 is close or the end condition 2 is close.

  In the advantageous section end notice of the present embodiment, the upper limit number of advantageous section games when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied and the prescribed number of medals net increase when the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. Although it is configured to notify in an identifiable manner, the prescribed number of advantageous section games when the end condition 1 is satisfied (the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games), and the upper limit of the net increase in medals when the end condition 2 is satisfied A configuration in which the number of sheets can be specified is also possible. In such a configuration, the player is made to recognize the prescribed number of games for the advantageous section game related to the advantageous section end condition 1 and the upper limit number of medals in the advantageous section related to the advantageous section end condition 2. In addition, the player can be made aware that the completion of the end condition 1 is near or the end condition 2 is close.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment defines the end condition 1 that is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. When any one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding the number of sheets (2388 in this embodiment) is satisfied, the advantageous section can be terminated, and the sub-control unit 91 can perform the advantageous section game. When the number reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the second predetermined value (this example) before the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number In any case, the common advantageous section end notice can be executed to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established, and the main control unit 41 As the ending condition 3 that can be satisfied before the ending condition 1 and the ending condition 2 are satisfied in the profit section, a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the gaming state controlled in the game is not inside) Is established), the advantageous section can be ended, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games. Alternatively, when the net predetermined number of medals exceeds a second predetermined value (in this example, 2088) before exceeding the prescribed number, the end condition 3 is not satisfied until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied. It is.

  According to this configuration, after the advantageous section end notice is executed because the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value or the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, the end condition 1 is satisfied. Since the advantageous section continues until the end condition 2 is satisfied or the end condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values has been described. However, slots for setting bets using game balls as game values. The present invention may be applied to a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that sets a bet amount using only credit as a gaming value. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, an example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball is launched into a gaming area. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines that play games.

  A second embodiment of the slot machine which is a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine of the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  The main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment is configured to play a game in one game state (inside) in which the type of the re-gamer that is the target of the internal lottery and the probability that the re-gamer will be won by the internal lottery are common. Thus, the medal payout rate is the same as the payout rate as designed. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment has a plurality of gaming states (advantage RT, initial RT , CZRT, inside normal RT, special state), the medal payout rate becomes the designed payout rate.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment gives the navigation stock as a right controlled by the AT by winning the AT lottery, and the AT game controlled by the AT by consuming the navigation stock. The control is performed over a predetermined number of games. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment performs a specific navigation notification in which an operation mode for shifting to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is notified by winning the AT lottery. This is a configuration in which specific navigation notification is performed by giving navigation stock as a right to be used and consuming the navigation stock.

[About gaming state]
As shown in FIG. 32, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to one of initial RT, CZRT, normal RT, advantageous RT, inside, and special state (BB (RB)). The gaming state is a state in which the type of re-game player to be a lottery subject to internal lottery and the probability that the re-game player will be won by internal lottery are common. In this embodiment, for each gaming state, at least one of the type of re-gamer that is subject to the internal lottery and the probability that the re-gamer will win in the internal lottery is different. The type of the re-game player to be targeted and the probability that the re-game player will win in the internal lottery are uniform.

  The initial RT is a gaming state that is controlled first after the special state is terminated after a setting change is made in the slot machine 1 (for example, after opening a store). The gaming state shifts to CZRT when a predetermined symbol combination (a symbol combination that is stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when one of the internal lottery targets to be described later is dropped) is stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The initial RT is finished. In the initial RT, the probability of winning the lottery target in the internal lottery is set so that the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%.

  The CZRT is started by shifting the predetermined symbol combination to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the initial RT, and the gaming combination is advantageous by stopping the symbol combination of the promotion replay to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is transferred to RT and finished. In addition, the gaming state is shifted to the normal RT and ended also when the symbol combination of the fall replay is stopped by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In CZRT, a push-order re-game player who is not subject to internal lottery in other gaming states such as initial RT is subject to internal lottery. In addition, the probability that the re-gamer wins in the internal lottery is set higher than the initial RT, as the push-order re-gamer wins in the internal lottery. Further, in CZRT, the probability that the lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery is set so that the payout rate of medals per game is about 100%.

  The normal RT starts when the symbol combination of the tumble replay stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in CZRT, and after the transition, a predetermined number of games (128 games in this embodiment) elapses. The gaming state is shifted to the initial RT and finished. In normal RT, a push order re-game player who is a target of internal lottery in CZRT is not a target of internal lottery. In addition, the probability that a re-gamer wins in the internal lottery is set lower than the initial RT. Also, in normal RT, the probability that the lottery target role is won in the internal lottery is set so that the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%.

  Advantageous RT is started when the symbol combination of promotion replay is stopped at reels 2L, 2C, 2R in CZRT, and after the transition, a predetermined number of games (20 games in this embodiment) elapses. The gaming state is shifted to the initial RT and finished. In the advantageous RT, the push order re-game player that is the target of internal lottery in CZRT is not the target of internal lottery. In addition, the probability that the re-gamer wins in the internal lottery is set higher than the initial RT, CZRT, and normal RT, and is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the initial RT, CZRT, and normal RT. In the advantageous RT, when the gaming state is continuously controlled to the advantageous RT, the initial RT, and the CZRT, the medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% (in the present embodiment, approximately 116). The probability of winning the lottery target in the internal lottery is set so as to be 0.7% (the payout rate at which the net increase in medals per game is about 0.5).

  Inside, the special role (BB) is being carried over. The special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery in the initial RT, CZRT, normal RT, and advantageous RT that are not inside, and the special role (BB) is won in the game where the special role (BB) is won. When the special combination (BB) in which the winning is carried over wins, the gaming state is shifted to the special state (BB (RB)) and is ended. In the inside, the push order re-game player who is the target of the internal lottery in CZRT is not the target of the internal lottery. In addition, the probability that a re-gamer wins in the internal lottery is set lower than other game states (initial RT, CZRT, normal RT, advantageous RT). In the interior, the probability of winning the lottery target in the internal lottery is set so that the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%.

  The special state (BB (RB)) is started by shifting to the inside by a special combination (BB) winning. The special state (BB (RB)) continues to RB until a predetermined end condition (in this embodiment, the number of medals paid out exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 260)) is satisfied. The gaming state is controlled. The RB is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the other gaming states (initial RT, CZRT, normal RT, advantageous RT, inside) by increasing the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery. The game state ends when the predetermined number of games is exhausted or when a predetermined type of combination (any type is acceptable) wins a predetermined number, whichever comes first. In the RB controlled during the BB (RB), the winning combination probability of the small role is not controlled by the BB (RB) because the special role and the replaying role are excluded from the lottery in the internal lottery. Is a high probability (1 / 1.0), and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 has a plurality of gaming states (advantage RT, initial RT, CZRT, normal RT internals) that have different types of re-game players to be subjected to internal lottery and different probabilities of re-game players being won by internal lottery Medium and special states), and a game is performed across a plurality of game states, whereby the payout rate of medals becomes a payout rate as designed.

[About lottery eligible for internal lottery]
The internal lottery object combination that is the lottery object in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target roles. Each internal lottery target includes one or a plurality of winning combinations. When one internal lottery target is won in the internal lottery, the winning combination included in the internal lottery target is elected at the same time. .

  As shown in FIG. 33, the internal lottery target roles include a special role (BB), a normal small role, a single role, a specific small role 1, a specific small role 2, a replaying role 1, a push order replaying role 1, Push order re-playing role 2, push-order re-playing role 3, push-order re-playing role 4, push-order re-playing role 5, push-order re-playing role 6 (hereinafter referred to as push-order re-playing roles 1-6 together) May be referred to as a re-game player).

  The special combination (BB) is a combination accompanied by a shift to the special state (BB (RB)) described above by winning. The special role (BB) is subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to the initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, or advantageous RT, while the gaming state is in the middle and special state (BB (RB)) When it is controlled, it is not subject to internal lottery.

  The normal small combination is a combination in which an increasing combination in which more medals are paid out than the bet amount wins regardless of the stop order of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R or the timing of the stop operation. The normal small combination is subject to internal lottery even when it is controlled in any gaming state (initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, advantageous RT, inside, special state (BB (RB))).

  The single winning combination is a winning combination in which one medal is paid out by performing a stop operation at an operation timing at which a predetermined symbol for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R can be stopped on the winning line LN. It is a role that can be awarded. When the gaming state is controlled to the initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, advantageous RT, inside, the normal small role is subject to internal lottery, while the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB (RB)). Is not eligible for internal lottery.

  The specific small role 1 and the specific small role 2 are roles having a low probability of winning in the internal lottery as compared to other internal lottery target roles. In addition, the specified small combination 1 is a combination having a higher probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specific small combination 2. Specified small role 1 and Specified small role 2 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is not inside and inside, and is generally controlled by the BB, and when the gaming state is controlled to any of these gaming states, The lottery will be won with the same probability. In addition, the specific small role 1 and the specific small role 2 are controlled in any game state (initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, advantageous RT, inside, special state (BB (RB))), Be eligible for internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is controlled in the initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, advantageous RT, inside, the re-gamer is subject to the internal lottery, while the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB (RB)). Is not eligible for internal lottery. Winning in the internal lottery with different probabilities according to the gaming state being controlled.

  The push order re-game players 1 to 6 are operated by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the specific operation mode (in this embodiment, the operation order) assigned to each push-order re-game player. Among the winning combinations included in the game combination, the symbol combination of promotion replay (for example, “Bell-Bell-Replay” etc.) can be stopped on the winning line LN, while the promotion replay can be won. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode (in this embodiment, the operation sequence) other than the specific operation mode assigned to each push-order re-game player, it is included in the push-sequence re-game player. Among the winning combinations, the symbol combination of tumble replay (for example, “Replay-Bell-Replay” etc.) is stopped on the winning line LN and the tumble replay wins. For this reason, at the time of winning the push order re-game players 1 to 6, the promotion replay is awarded depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in a specific operation mode according to the type of the push-order re-play game players who have won. In some cases, a fall replay may be won, and the expected value for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous RT can be changed. The replay (replay game) is awarded both when the promotion replay wins and when the fall replay wins.

  A specific operation mode in which the promotion replay can be awarded when the push order re-players 1 to 6 are elected, that is, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, is that the push-order re-play player 1 uses the left reel 2L. This is an operation in the order of operations that stops the first, stops the second reel 2C second, and stops the right reel 2R third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as left middle right stop operation). In the gaming combination 2, the operation in the order of operations in which the left reel 2L is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a left / right middle stop operation). In the push order replaying player 3, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. May be referred to as middle / left / right stop operation) Thus, in the push order replaying game 4, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped third. In the push order re-playing combination 5, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a right / left middle stop operation), the push-replay game player 6 stops the right reel 2R first, the middle reel 2C second, and the left reel 2L This is an operation in the order of operations to be stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right / middle / left stop operation).

  Pushing order re-gamers 1 to 6 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled by CZRT, while the gaming state is a special state other than CZRT (initial RT, normal RT, advantageous RT, inside, When controlled to a special state (BB (RB))), it is not an object of internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, one of the internal lottery winning combinations, the replaying role, and the push order replaying roles 1 to 6 are set with a probability that there is no difference according to the set value set in the slot machine 1, that is, set. On the other hand, regardless of the set value, the winning combination is set with a uniform probability, while the special combination (BB), the normal small combination, the specific small combination 1, and the specific small combination 2 among the internal lottery target combinations are set. According to the set value that has been set, it will be won with a probability of difference.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming section to the advantageous section when the predetermined advantageous section lottery target (special role (BB (RB))) is won in the internal lottery. A lottery is performed. In the advantageous section lottery, it is determined with a probability of 100% to shift to the advantageous section, and by winning the advantageous section lottery target role, it is advantageous from the next game that the advantageous section lottery target part wins. It will be controlled to the section.

  The main control unit 41 wins a push re-playing game role when the predetermined AT lottery target role (ordinary small role, specific small role 1, specific small role 2, replaying role) is won in the internal lottery. An AT lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant a right (navigation stock) for performing a specific navigation notification that notifies a specific operation mode for stopping a symbol combination of promotion replay sometimes. When the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, an AT lottery is performed by winning one of these AT lottery targets in the internal lottery. The main control unit 41 consumes one navigation stock at a time for each winning of the push order replaying game when one or more of the navigation stock given by winning the AT lottery remains. Control of specific navigation notification for notifying a specific operation mode is performed. In the control of specific navigation notification, a navigation number capable of specifying a specific operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and a command capable of specifying the specific operation mode is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Yes.

  Also, in the AT lottery that is triggered by the fact that the specified small role 1 or the specified small role 2 is won in the internal lottery, the probability is higher than when the normal small role or the re-playing role is won Thus, it is determined that the control is performed by the AT. In addition, in the AT lottery performed when the specified small role 1 is won, it is determined that the AT is controlled with a higher probability than when the specified small role 2 is won. It is like that.

  In the AT lottery, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB (RB)), it is more controlled than when the gaming state is controlled to other gaming states (initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, advantageous RT, inside). It is determined that the right to perform specific navigation notification with a high probability is granted, and a predetermined number of specific navigation notifications (three in average in this embodiment) are performed in one special state (BB (RB)). Right (Navistock) can be granted.

[Flow of game control and effect control]
The flow of the control related to the game by the main control unit 41 and the control related to the effect by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to the initial RT, CZRT, normal RT, advantageous RT, inside, and special state (BB (RB)). The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in a specific operation mode at the time of winning the re-playing roles 1 to 6, so that the symbol combination of the promotion replay is stopped and shifted from CZRT to advantageous RT. The stop operation of 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, so that the symbol combination of the fall replay is stopped and the CZRT is shifted to the normal RT. In addition, AT lottery is performed when an AT lottery target role is won by internal lottery during an advantageous section. And, the navigation stock is given by winning the AT lottery, and the given navigation stock is consumed, and the specific navigation notification for notifying the specific operation mode at the time of winning the push order re-playing gamer is performed. Yes.

  As a result, when one or more navigation stocks are given, a specific navigation notification is given at the time of winning the push order re-playing gamers 1 to 6 in CZRT, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. By performing in a specific operation mode, the symbol combination of the promotion replay is stopped, the CZRT is shifted to the advantageous RT, and then the initial RT is controlled again to the CZRT so that the medal payout rate is 100%. It is possible to allow the game to be played in a game state circulation that is advantageous to the player beyond. On the other hand, when the navigation stock is not given, the specific navigation notification is not performed at the time of winning the push order re-playing game combination 1 to 6 in CZRT. At this time, the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed in a specific operation mode, so that the symbol combination of the promotion replay is stopped and the CZRT is shifted to the advantageous RT, but the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, the symbol combination of the fall replay may be stopped and the CZRT may be shifted to the normal RT. In CZRT, by not performing specific navigation notification at the time of winning the push order re-playing gamers 1 to 6, the symbol combination of the fall replay is stopped, the CZRT is shifted to the normal RT, and then the initial RT is passed to the CZRT. By controlling again, the game is played in a circulation of a gaming state which is disadvantageous for a player whose medal payout rate does not exceed 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the main control unit 41 controls the gaming state to one of the initial RT, CZRT, normal RT, advantageous RT, inside, and special state (BB (RB)) while playing the game section. Can be controlled in the normal section and the advantageous section, and when the regular section is controlled, the advantageous section transition lottery (special role (BB)) is elected in the internal lottery, so that the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. And by winning in the advantageous section shift lottery, the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. And when controlling to an advantageous section, AT lottery is won by winning an AT lottery target role in internal lottery, and navigation stock is given by winning the AT lottery. When controlling to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the gaming state to any of the initial RT, normal RT, CZRT, advantageous RT, inside, special state (BB (RB)), these Regardless of which state is controlled, an AT lottery winning combination is won by internal lottery to perform AT lottery, and a predetermined number of navigation stocks are given by winning the AT lottery.

  For example, when the normal section and the normal RT are controlled, the special section (BB) is elected as the advantageous section transition lottery target role, thereby shifting the gaming section to the advantageous section. When the special role (BB) is carried over, the gaming state is shifted to the inside.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91, when the gaming state is controlled to the normal RT or inside in the main control unit 41 side, regardless of whether the gaming section is a normal section or an advantageous section, Control is performed so that a normal performance is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 41 controls the special state (BB (RB)) by winning the winning special combination (BB). In the special state (BB (RB)), when an AT lottery target is elected by internal lottery, AT lottery is performed, and by winning the AT lottery, navigation stock is given to the navigation stock counter. to add. Thereafter, when the termination condition for the special state (BB (RB)) is satisfied, the special state (BB (RB)) is terminated and the gaming state is shifted to the initial RT.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB (RB)) on the main control unit 41 side, the sub control unit 91 suggests that the special state is controlled to the special state. Is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. When the special condition (BB (RB)) is terminated and the special condition (BB (RB)) is terminated, whether or not navigation stock is given in the special condition (BB (RB)). Or a navigation stock suggestion effect that suggests the number given when navigation stock is given.

  In the navigation stock suggestion effect, an image selected by a background lottery for selecting one background image from predetermined background images A to C is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the background lottery, a lottery for selecting a background image based on the remaining number of currently assigned navigation stocks specified based on a command received from the main control unit 41 is performed. When the remaining number is 0 to 1, the background image A is selected at the highest rate, and when the remaining number of navigation stock is 2 to 3, the background image B is selected at the highest rate and the navigation image is selected. When the remaining number of stocks is 4 or more, the background image C is set to have the highest selection ratio. Thereby, in the navigation stock suggestion effect, the remaining number of navigation stocks provided on the main control unit 41 side is suggested depending on which of the background images A to C is displayed as the background image. .

  After performing the Navistock suggestion effect, the special state effect and the Navistock suggestion effect are terminated and the CZ effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, etc. on condition that the bet number of the next game is set and the start switch 7 is operated. To do. The CZ effect is an effect that is performed when the game state is controlled to the initial RT or CZRT on the main control unit 41 side, and that the game state is controlled to the CZRT or the game state is controlled to the initial RT. It is suggested that it is controlled by CZRT.

  When the main control unit 41 controls the gaming state to the initial RT, one winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the one winning combination is missed, and a predetermined symbol combination (by missing one winning combination) When the symbols 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped), the gaming state is shifted to CZRT. And when the game state is controlled to CZRT, when any of the push forward game players 1 to 6 in the internal lottery wins, the remaining number of navigation stock is 1 with reference to the navigation stock counter. In the case above, the value of the navigation stock counter is decremented by 1, and one navigation stock is consumed, and control is performed so that specific navigation notification is performed. In the specific navigation notification, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which is a specific operation mode corresponding to the selected push-order re-playing game player and can receive a promotion replay included in the push-order re-play game game. A navigation number that can specify the mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and a command that can specify the specific operation mode is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 performs a specific navigation effect informing the specific operation mode when the specific operation mode is specified based on a command received from the main control unit 41 side. In the specific navigation effect, the navigation image suggesting the specific operation mode specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby promoting the promotion replay at the time of winning the push-order re-gamer. The specific operation mode that can be won is notified.

  In addition, although it is not specified that the specific navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that any one of the push forward re-playing game combinations 1 to 6 is won in the internal lottery. Sometimes, a push order re-playing game character 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by displaying a push order re-playing game suggestion image (for example, an image displaying “???” corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R). ~ 6 suggests winning. By suggesting that the push order re-playing players 1 to 6 are won, even if the remaining number of navigation stocks is 0, it is controlled to be advantageous RT by performing a stop operation in a specific operation mode in the game Has come to be suggested.

  The main control unit 41 shifts the gaming state to the advantageous RT by performing the stop operation in the specific operation mode and winning the promoted replay when the push order re-game player is won. On the other hand, at the time of winning the push order re-playing gamer, the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, and the promotion replay does not win and the fall replay wins, thereby shifting the gaming state to the normal RT. . Whether the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous RT or the normal RT, when the predetermined number of games have passed, the game is shifted to the initial RT and is again controlled by the CZRT. By pushing specific re-playing gamers when the remaining number of navigation stock is 1 or more, the specific navigation notification will be performed until the remaining number of navigation stock becomes 0. It is possible to continue the circulation of the gaming state which is advantageous for the sequentially controlled player.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls that the promotion replay is won by performing a stop operation in a specific operation mode when the push order re-gamer is elected, that is, the main control unit 41 controls to be advantageous RT. When this is done, an advantageous RT effect (usually) that suggests that the advantageous RT is controlled is started.

  As in the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment establishes an end condition that is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment). 1. The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone is the prescribed number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum number (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number of 2,400) and used for setting the number of bets. The advantageous section is ended when at least one of the end conditions 2 that are satisfied by exceeding the maximum number (three sheets) to be added))) is satisfied. In addition, when the predetermined condition (in this embodiment, the gaming state is normal RT and the remaining number of navigation stock is 0) is satisfied, the end condition 3 that is satisfied is satisfied, End the advantageous section. And when ending an advantageous section, the advantageous area data initialization process is performed and the data (including the number of navigation stock) regarding an advantageous area are initialized.

  Further, the main control unit 41 controls that the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment) or increases the medal net of the advantageous section while controlling the gaming section as the advantageous section. When the number of sheets exceeds the second predetermined value (2338 in this embodiment), a special grant that specially grants a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment) of navigation stock is performed, and the advantageous section end condition It is possible to perform ending control that allows the advantageous section to continue until (end condition 1, end condition 2) is satisfied.

  When the special grant is triggered by the ending control when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), a predetermined number of navigation stocks are granted by the special grant. Thus, it is controlled to be advantageous RT (20 games per set) at least for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times) corresponding to the number of assigned navigation stocks, that is, the upper limit number of advantageous section games. It is possible to continue the advantageous section over the number of games that are the difference from the first predetermined value (100 games in this embodiment) or more, and it is possible to continue the advantageous section up to the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section. In addition, when the special grant is performed when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2338 in the present embodiment) due to the ending control, the predetermined number of navigation stocks are added by the special grant. As a result, the game becomes a predetermined payout rate in which the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% (in this embodiment, the payout rate at which the net increase in medals is about 0.5 per game). The game state circulation (initial RT, CZRT, advantageous RT circulation) that is advantageous to the player is performed at a predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, 5 advantageous RTs) corresponding to at least the number of navigation stocks given. Continue over the number of games and the total number of games played in the initial RT and CZRT controlled during the advantageous RT (at least 100 games) Doo is possible, medals net increase number of advantageous interval it is possible to continue the favorable period to more than a defined number.

  On the other hand, after starting the above-described advantageous RT effect (normal), the sub-control unit 91 makes an advantageous RT effect (every time the game state is shifted to the initial RT or CZRT on the main control unit 41 side). Normal) is interrupted, and the above-described CZ effect is performed. Then, when the CZRT is finished and the process is shifted to the advantageous RT, the interrupted advantageous RT effect (normal) is controlled to be resumed. In addition, when CZRT is ended and the routine is shifted to the normal RT, the normal RT is performed by continuing to interrupt the advantageous RT effect (normal) on condition that the remaining number of navigation stock is one or more. Then, when it is shifted to the advantageous RT, the suspended advantageous RT effect (normal) is resumed. On the other hand, when the remaining number of navigation stock is 0 when CZRT is ended and the routine is shifted to normal RT, that is, when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous RT effect (normal) is ended, Control to perform a normal performance.

  Further, after starting the advantageous RT effect (normal), the sub-control unit 91 performs an advantageous RT with an effect mode different from the advantageous RT effect (normal) after the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side. Control to perform production (ending). By performing the advantageous RT effect (ending), it is suggested that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous RT, and the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side, which is advantageous up to the upper limit of the advantageous section. This suggests that it is possible to continue the section.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment), the main control unit 41 determines that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. When the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is ended, that is, at the end of the game, the advantageous interval data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous interval and shift to the normal interval. At this time, the gaming state is maintained in the controlled gaming state, and thereafter, when the gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the corresponding gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side, the number of advantageous section games is set to the first predetermined value (1400 in this embodiment) at the start of each game. It is determined whether or not the game has reached one of a third predetermined value (1395 games in this embodiment) and the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment).

  Then, control is performed so that the advantageous RT effect (normal) is performed until the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. When it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value in a state where the advantageous RT performance (normal) is being performed (including the state where the advantageous RT performance (normal) is interrupted), At the start of the game specified that the number of advantageous segment games has reached the third predetermined value, the navigation stock is 1 or more, or the remaining number of advantageous RTs is the predetermined number of games (the current advantageous segment game number and the first 1) The ending suggestion effect is started on the condition that the difference is equal to or more than the predetermined value) and the advantageous RT effect is continuously performed. Then, at the end of the game one game before the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect, and the advantageous RT effect (ending) is displayed. Announce that it is confirmed that it will be performed.

  Thereafter, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the ending suggestion effect is ended and the ending start image of the advantageous RT effect (ending) is displayed. An advantageous RT effect (ending) is started by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, at the start of the game when the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the advance advantageous section end notice is started as a prior notice for informing the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance, and the end condition of the advantageous section is established The notification that is close is started.

  In the advantageous section end notice of the present embodiment, similarly to the advantageous section end notice in the first embodiment, the difference in the number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit value of the advantageous section game number, And the difference between the medals net increase until the end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, the remaining number up to the specified number of medals net increase, is executed in a manner capable of recognizing, and every time the advantageous section game number and the medals net increase are updated. The difference in the number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the difference in the net medal increase until the end condition 2 is satisfied are updated.

  Thereafter, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the end of the advantageous section notice (preliminary notification) is ended, and the end condition establishment notification 1 is sent as a post-notification to notify the end of the advantageous section later. The notification to the effect that the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied is started. In addition, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is finished in the game in which the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, that is, at the end of the game, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is started Thus, notification that the information related to the advantageous section, in particular information related to navigation notification (remaining number of navigation stock) has been initialized, is started.

  In addition, when the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and when the game with the falling replay that triggers the end of CZRT ends, the result is notified and the advantageous RT effect (normal) is started. The game history (the number of games, the number of net increase) from the played game to the game for notifying the result is suggested.

  Then, a predetermined notification end condition 4 established when a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment) are performed after the result notification is performed, and a predetermined notification end condition 4 is satisfied after the result notification is performed. Either the predetermined notification end condition 5 or the predetermined notification end condition 5 after the result notification is satisfied, which is established by the settlement process being performed on the main control unit 41 side. Before the game, the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied among the predetermined notification end conditions 6 that are satisfied when the state in which the game is not performed is continued for a predetermined period (3 minutes in the present embodiment). Then, the end condition establishment notification 1 and the advantageous section related information initialization notification, which are subsequent notifications, are terminated.

  After performing the result notification, the sub-control unit 91 performs a normal performance from the start of the next game, and the end condition establishment notification 1 and the advantageous section related information initialization notification, which are subsequent notifications, The game may be performed over a game in which notification is performed or a game in which a normal performance is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 determines that the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment), that is, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the specified number + 1 or more. In the game in which the medal net increase exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is completed, that is, at the end of the game. Then, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted to. At this time, the gaming state is maintained in the controlled gaming state, and thereafter, when the gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the corresponding gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side, at the end of each game, the medal net increase number in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (in this embodiment). , 2338 sheets), a fourth predetermined value (2335 sheets in this embodiment), or a prescribed number (2388 sheets in this embodiment) is determined.

  Then, until the start of the next game after the game where the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, until the start of the next game after the game where the medal net increased number reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the advantageous RT effect (normally ). When it is specified that the medal net increase exceeds the fourth predetermined value in a state where the advantageous RT effect (normal) is performed, that is, when it is specified that the medal net increase has reached the fourth predetermined value + 1, At the end of the game specified that the net medal increased number exceeds the fourth predetermined value, the navigation stock is 1 or more, or the remaining number of advantageous RTs is the predetermined game number (the current medal net increased number and the second predetermined value). The ending suggestion effect is started on the condition that the number of games (6 games) corresponding to the difference from the value is equal to or greater, and the advantageous RT effect (normal) is continuously performed. Then, at the end of the game in which the net medal increase number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the game in which the medal net increase number reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect. Then, the fact that the advantageous RT effect (ending) is confirmed is notified.

  Thereafter, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the next game after the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, after the game where the medal net increased number reaches the second predetermined value + 1. At the start of the game, the ending suggestion effect is ended, and the ending start image of the advantageous RT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to start the advantageous RT effect (ending). In addition, at the start of the game next to the game where the net number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value, the advance advantageous section end notice is started as a prior notice for informing the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance, and the advantageous section ends. The notification that the conditions are almost satisfied is started.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is finished in the game where the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, and the payout of medals is completed, that is, the game in which the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. At the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end notice (preliminary notice) is terminated, the end condition establishment notice 2 is started as a post-notification to inform the end of the advantageous section later, and the advantageous section end condition 2 is established. Start notification. In addition, at the end of the game where the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, advantageous section related information initialization notification is started as a post-notification, and information on the advantageous section, particularly information on navigation notification (remaining number of navigation stock) Starts to notify that is initialized.

  In addition, when a game after the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and when the game where the falling replay that is the end of the CZRT is won, the result is notified and the advantageous RT effect (normal) is given. The game history (the number of games, the number of net increase) from the game which started to the game which reports the result is suggested.

  Then, a predetermined notification end condition 4 established when a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment) are performed after the result notification is performed, and a predetermined notification end condition 4 is satisfied after the result notification is performed. Either the predetermined notification end condition 5 or the predetermined notification end condition 5 after the result notification is satisfied, which is established by the settlement process being performed on the main control unit 41 side. Before the game, the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied among the predetermined notification end conditions 6 that are satisfied when the state in which the game is not performed is continued for a predetermined period (3 minutes in the present embodiment). Then, the end condition establishment notification 2 and the advantageous section related information initialization notification, which are subsequent notifications, are terminated.

  After performing the result notification, the sub-control unit 91 performs a normal performance from the start of the next game, and the end condition establishment notification 1 and the advantageous section related information initialization notification, which are subsequent notifications, The game may be performed over a game in which notification is performed or a game in which a normal performance is performed.

  Further, in the result notification performed after the advantageous section ends, the sub-control unit 91 displays a maximum of 1500 games in the game history (the number of games and the net increase), and the net increase in medals is 2400 at the maximum. It is displayed as a sheet. Thereby, for example, the special state (BB (RB)) is controlled during the advantageous section, and the result notification is performed after the advantageous section is terminated during the special state, or after the advantageous section ends. When one or more games have been played by the time, even if the net increase in the number of medals increases from the end of the advantageous section until the result notification is performed, the result notification indicates the number of advantageous section games as the game history. The number of games exceeding the upper limit number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment) or the net increase number exceeding the upper limit number of net medals (2400 in this embodiment) in the advantageous section is not displayed. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the upper limit game number of the number of segment games and the upper limit number of medals in the advantageous section.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs from the start of the game when the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value to the start of the game after which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. From the end of the game when the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, from the end of the game where the net increase in medal reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the net increase in medals reaches the specified number. It is possible to give an advance notice of an advantageous section over the period until the end of the game that exceeds, that is, until the end of the game when the net increase in medals reaches the specified number + 1. Before reaching the advantageous section ending condition 1 or before the advantageous section ending condition 2 is satisfied when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number End establishment of the condition 1 or termination condition 2 is that it is possible to notify that close, it is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous interval is terminated by termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is satisfied.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 establishes a predetermined notification termination condition from a game in which the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit game number or the medal net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. It is possible to perform an end condition establishment notification (end condition establishment notification 1 or end condition establishment notification 2) and advantageous section related information initialization notification as a post-event notification over a predetermined period until the end condition 1 or end of the advantageous section After the condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to notify that the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied and that the information related to the advantageous section is initialized along with the end of the advantageous section. By performing advantageous section related information initialization notification as a post-event notification, even if the advantageous section ends and the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the player may be dissatisfied or confused. Can be prevented. Further, by performing the post-notification for a predetermined period, even when the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it can be surely recognized that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

[Effect 5]
As a conventional slot machine, the advantageous state is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit of 1500 games, the advantageous state is terminated and the advantageous state There is a configuration in which information related to control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining games is also initialized.

  In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is terminated, and information related to the control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining advantageous games is also provided. It will be initialized, but information related to the control of the advantageous state is initialized, and there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied with the player who does not know that the information is not carried over to the subsequent game There is a risk of confusion.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. When either one is established, it is possible to end the advantageous section, and it is possible to execute an advantageous section data initialization process for initializing information relating to the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. Further, the slot machine 1 includes a sub-control unit 91 capable of performing advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information relating to the advantageous section has been initialized, and the sub-control unit 91 ends the advantageous section. The advantageous section related information initialization notification is started in the game to be performed, and the advantageous section related information initialization notification is continued in the game after the game in which the advantageous section ends.

  According to this configuration, when one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends, and the information about the advantageous section is initialized. Since the advantageous section related information initialization notification that informs the effect is performed, even if the advantageous section ends and information on the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the player may be dissatisfied or confused Can be prevented. Further, the advantageous section related information initialization notification starts in the game where the advantageous section ends, and is continuously performed in the game after the game where the advantageous section ends. Even when the initialization notification is missed, it can be surely recognized that the information related to the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

  The sub-control unit 91 can perform advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information related to the advantageous section has been initialized, and a game result in the advantageous section in a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends. In the game in which the effect presentation is executed and the normal effect is executed after the result notification is executed, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is started in the game in which the advantageous section ends. This is a configuration in which the advantageous section related information initialization notification is continued even in a game after a game in which a section ends and a game in which a result notification is executed and a game in which a normal effect is executed.

  According to this configuration, the advantageous section related information initialization notification starts in a game in which the advantageous section ends, is a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, and a game in which the result notification in the advantageous section is executed and Since it is continuously performed in the game in which the subsequent normal performance is executed, even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game where the advantageous section ends, it is ensured that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over. Can be recognized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to advantageous sections can be executed. Advantageous section end condition 1 is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous sections (the number of advantageous section games) is the specified number of games In the embodiment, it is to reach 1500 games), and the end condition 2 is that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment).

  According to this configuration, the advantageous section is ended when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the prescribed number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. Since it is initialized, it can suppress that gambling nature increases more than being controlled by an advantageous area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, The right section data initialization process that initializes the information about the advantageous section is configured to be executed, and the right to perform the specific navigation notification in which the stop operation of the reel that can be shifted to the advantageous RT is notified of the specific operation mode. A certain navigation stock is consumed, a specific navigation notification is performed, a stop operation is issued in a specific operation mode, and the symbol combination of the promoted replay is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, so that the gaming state is advantageous to the player It is possible to control to the advantageous RT which is an advantageous state, the information regarding the advantageous section includes the navigation stock, and the main control unit 41 ends in the advantageous section. When either one of matter 1 or termination condition 2 is satisfied, it is configured to terminate the advantageous interval even if the navigation stock remains 1 or more.

  According to this configuration, even when one or more navigation stocks remain, the advantageous section ends, and even when the navigation stock is not subsequently taken over as information relating to the advantageous section, the player can be aware of that. It is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment consumes the navigation stock, which is the right to perform specific navigation notification that notifies the specific operation mode of the reel stop operation that can be shifted to the advantageous RT, and performs the specific navigation notification. By performing the stop operation in a specific operation mode and the symbol combination of the promoted replay is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state can be controlled to the advantageous RT which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The sub-control unit 91 is capable of performing advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information related to the advantageous section including the navigation stock has been initialized, and the main control section 41 side. It is the structure which can perform the navistock suggestion production which suggests the remaining number of navistock given by.

  According to this configuration, until the information related to the advantageous section is initialized, that is, until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, the identification that is given to the main control unit 41 and remains without being consumed. It is possible to suggest the remaining number of navigation stocks, which is the right to perform navigation notification, by the navigation stock suggestion effect. Even if it is suggested that the navigation stock remains, even if the advantageous section ends and the right to control the advantageous state as information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the advantageous section related information is initialized. The notification allows the player to recognize that fact, so that the player can be prevented from being dissatisfied or confused.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section can be executed, and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) is the specified number of games (this embodiment) In this case, the sub-control unit 91 starts a game in which the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous section ends. In other words, when the start switch 7 of the game is operated, an end condition establishment notification 1 for notifying that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached the specified number of games can be executed. A Do configuration.

  According to this configuration, when the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, that is, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), the game It is possible to recognize that the advantageous section is over.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section can be executed, and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). When the advantageous section ending condition 2 is satisfied and the advantageous section is ended, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to end all the games in the game. When the reel is stopped and the stop switch operation for the third stop of the game is finished, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number A configuration capable of executing a termination condition is satisfied notification 2 for informing fact.

  According to this configuration, when the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (2388 in this embodiment), the advantageous section ends in the game. Can be recognized.

  In this embodiment, the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is a configuration that is established when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The configuration may be established when the number of controlled games exceeds the number of games (for example, 1499 games) immediately before reaching the specified number of games. Similarly, the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is configured so that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (2388 in this embodiment), but the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is It may be a specified value (for example, 2389 sheets) or more.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, The advantage section data initialization process for initializing the information related to the advantageous section can be executed, and the symbol combination of the promoted replay is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the CZRT, so that the player is more than the CZRT. It is possible to shift to the advantageous RT, and after the advantageous RT is finished, the initial RT can be shifted to the CZRT. When there is a remaining navigation stock that is the right to perform a specific navigation notification that notifies the specific operation mode of the reel stop operation that can be performed, CZ In T, it is possible to perform specific navigation notification for notifying the specific operation mode (in this embodiment, the pressing order) in which the symbol combination of the promoted replay is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The advantageous section data initialization process to be performed is configured to include the remaining number of navigation stock in the information regarding the advantageous section to be initialized.

  According to this configuration, the advantageous section is ended while leaving the navigation stock that is the right to perform the specific navigation notification, and the remaining number of the navigation stock is not subsequently taken over as the information regarding the advantageous section, and the specific navigation notification is performed in the subsequent CZRT. Prevents the player from being dissatisfied or confused even if the specific operation mode for stopping the symbol combination of the promotion replay is not notified, because the player can recognize it. it can.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section can be executed, and the game value owned by the player can be stored as a credit in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the game is not being played. When the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10, the settlement control is performed to settle the medals stored in the credits and return them to the player. Further, the sub-control unit 91 can perform advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information regarding the advantageous section has been initialized, and in the game where the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is performed. Is started, and the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when the settlement control is performed.

  According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game, the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when the settlement control is performed. It is possible to prevent the information initialization notification from continuing.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information on advantageous sections can be executed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs advantageous section related information initialization notification for notifying that information on advantageous sections has been initialized. It is possible to start the advantageous section related information initialization notification in the game where the advantageous section ends, and after the game, the number of bets for starting the next game is not set, and a predetermined period (in this embodiment, This is a configuration in which the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when three minutes) have elapsed.

  According to this configuration, after the game is over, the betting number for starting the next game is not set, and the advantageous section related information initialization notification is terminated when a predetermined period has elapsed, so the player has changed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section related information initialization notification from continuing.

[Operation effect 6]
As a conventional slot machine, there is a configuration that controls an advantageous state advantageous to the player and terminates the advantageous state when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches 1500 games which is a limit value.

  In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state ends, but even in a situation where the number of games controlled to the advantageous state does not reach the limit value, There is a possibility that an advantageous situation may occur in the meantime, and it is not possible to sufficiently prevent an excessive advantage.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The main control unit 41 includes the number of advantageous section games and medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The net increase number can be counted and updated, and the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section Can be terminated when either one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding the prescribed number (2388 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. In addition, when the slot machine 1 reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number. A sub-control unit capable of executing a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established regardless of when the previous second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached. 91, the sub-control unit 91 includes the remaining number of games up to the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games as information related to the end condition 1 and information on the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section as information regarding the end condition 2 In this configuration, both the remaining number of sheets up to the upper limit number are notified.

  According to this configuration, the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase in number of medals updated in the advantageous section is established when the number exceeds the specified number. Even when one of the end conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section is ended when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively advantageous by being controlled to the advantageous section. Moreover, it is advantageous in any case when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in number of medals reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the prescribed number. Since the common advantageous section end notice is executed to notify that the end condition of the section is almost established, it is possible to notify in advance that the advantageous section will be ended. Is established and the advantageous section can be prevented from suddenly ending. At this time, since the common advantageous section end notice includes both information related to the end condition 1 and information related to the end condition 2, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is used even if the common advantageous section end notice is included. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end by

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 establishes the advantageous section end condition 1 when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value). It is determined that the advantageous section is ended, and it is determined that the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value). The advantageous section may be configured to end, or the advantageous section end condition 1 is reached when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (first prescribed value −1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first prescribed value). It may be determined that is established and the advantageous section is terminated. In addition, the main control unit 41 determines that the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (second prescribed value), and terminates the advantageous section. However, if the net increase in the advantageous zone reaches the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1) or more than the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number, the favorable condition end condition 2 is satisfied. It may be determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the advantageous section may be terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the advantageous section end notice when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment). The advantage section end notice is executed when the number of games exceeds the first predetermined value, but it is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value immediately before reaching the first predetermined value (1399 games). It may be configured to execute a section end notice. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute the advance notice of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2338 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that an advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of sheets reaches a second predetermined value or more, or an advantageous section end notice is executed when the net increase in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value + 1. .

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The main control unit 41 counts the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The end condition 1 established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the prescribed number In the embodiment, when any one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding 2388) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.

  According to this configuration, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase in the number of medals increased during the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number and reaches the prescribed number + 1 or more. Since the section ends, it can be suppressed that the section becomes advantageous more than being controlled to the advantageous section.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (2338 in this embodiment) is reached before reaching the value, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice that informs that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established The advantageous section end notice includes the difference in the number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the remaining number of games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games, and the net increase in medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied. Difference, that is, in a manner in which the remaining number up to the prescribed number of medals is increased, and the end condition 1 is satisfied each time the advantageous section game number and the medals net increase number are updated. A configuration in which the difference of medals net increase number of preferably up period number of games of the difference and the termination condition 2 is satisfied is updated.

  According to this configuration, the remaining number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the remaining net increase in medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied are recognized in real time every time the remaining value changes. Can do.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached before reaching the value, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established The advantageous section end notice is the case where the upper limit number of advantageous section games (1500 games in this embodiment) when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. The specified number of medals with net increase is notified in a identifiable manner, and is started when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, or when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value. ,advantageous Termination condition is satisfied is near or that establishment of termination condition 2 1 between is configured to notify that close.

  According to this configuration, the player is made to recognize the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games related to the advantageous section end condition 1 and the prescribed number of medals net increase in the advantageous section related to the advantageous section end condition 2. And the player can be made aware that the end condition 1 is close or the end condition 2 is close.

  In the advantageous section end notice of the present embodiment, the upper limit number of advantageous section games when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied and the prescribed number of medals net increase when the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. Although it is configured to notify in an identifiable manner, the prescribed number of advantageous section games when the end condition 1 is satisfied (the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games), and the upper limit of the net increase in medals when the end condition 2 is satisfied A configuration in which the number of sheets can be specified is also possible. In such a configuration, the player is made to recognize the prescribed number of games for the advantageous section game related to the advantageous section end condition 1 and the upper limit number of medals in the advantageous section related to the advantageous section end condition 2. In addition, the player can be made aware that the completion of the end condition 1 is near or the end condition 2 is close.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment defines the end condition 1 that is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. When any one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding the number of sheets (2388 in this embodiment) is satisfied, the advantageous section can be terminated, and the sub-control unit 91 can perform the advantageous section game. When the number reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the second predetermined value (this example) before the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number In any case, the common advantageous section end notice can be executed to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established, and the main control unit 41 As the ending condition 3 that can be satisfied before the ending condition 1 and the ending condition 2 are satisfied in the profit section, a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the gaming state controlled in the game is not inside) Is established), the advantageous section can be ended, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games. Alternatively, when the net predetermined number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value (2338 in this embodiment) before exceeding the prescribed number, the end condition 3 is not satisfied until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied. It is.

  According to this configuration, after the advantageous section end notice is executed because the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value or the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, the end condition 1 is satisfied. Since the advantageous section continues until the end condition 2 is satisfied or the end condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 12 Game auxiliary indicator 12a Advantageous section notification LED
41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
In the slot machine capable of deriving the display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and winning can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling the advantageous section advantageous to the player;
Advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section when either the first termination condition or the second termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous section;
Initialization means for initializing information about the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends;
Initialization notification means for performing initialization notification for notifying that information on the advantageous section is initialized;
A game result notifying means for notifying a game result in the advantageous section in a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends;
Normal effect executing means for executing a normal effect after the game result is notified;
With
The initialization notification means starts the initialization notification in a game in which the advantageous section ends, a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, and a game in which the game result is notified and the normal effect are executed. A slot machine that continues the initialization notification even in a played game.

Images